V62/09643-01XE [TI]
Digital Media System-on-Chip(DMSoC); 数字媒体系统级芯片( DMSoC )型号: | V62/09643-01XE |
厂家: | TEXAS INSTRUMENTS |
描述: | Digital Media System-on-Chip(DMSoC) |
文件: | 总156页 (文件大小:1615K) |
中文: | 中文翻译 | 下载: | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
1 SM320DM355-EP Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
1.1 Features
Digital Output
BT.601/BT.656 Digital YCbCr 4:2:2
(8-/16-Bit) Interface
Supports digital HDTV (720p/1080i)
output for connection to external
encoder
•
High-Performance Digital Media
System-on-Chip
•
•
–
135-, 216-, and 270-MHz ARM926EJ-S Clock
Rate; and Up to 216 MHz in M-Temp
(M216EP)
–
Fully Software-Compatible With ARM9™
•
•
External Memory Interfaces (EMIFs)
•
ARM926EJ-S Core
–
DDR2 and mDDR SDRAM 16-bit wide EMIF
With 256 MByte Address Space (1.8-V I/O)
–
Support for 32-Bit and 16-Bit (Thumb Mode)
Instruction Sets
–
Asynchronous16-/8-bit Wide EMIF (AEMIF)
–
DSP Instruction Extensions and Single
Cycle MAC
•
Flash Memory Interfaces
–
–
NAND (8-/16-bit Wide Data)
OneNAND(16-bit Wide Data)
–
–
ARM® Jazelle® Technology
EmbeddedICE-RT™ Logic for Real-Time
Debug
Flash Card Interfaces
•
ARM9 Memory Architecture
–
Two Multimedia Card (MMC) / Secure
Digital (SD/SDIO)
SmartMedia
–
–
–
–
–
16K-Byte Instruction Cache
8K-Byte Data Cache
32K-Byte RAM
8K-Byte ROM
Little Endian
–
•
•
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (64 Independent Channels)
USB Port with Integrated 2.0 High-Speed PHY
that Supports
–
–
Three 64-Bit General-Purpose Timers (each
configurable as two 32-bit timers)
One 64-Bit Watch Dog Timer
Three UARTs (One fast UART with RTS and
CTS Flow Control)
•
•
MPEG4/JPEG Coprocessor
Fixed Function Coprocessor Supports:
USB 2.0 Full and High-Speed Device
USB 2.0 Low, Full, and High-Speed Host
–
•
MPEG4 SP Codec at HD (720p), D1,
VGA, SIF
•
•
JPEG Codec up to 50M Pixels per
Second
•
•
Video Processing Subsystem
– Front End Provides:
•
•
•
Three Serial Port Interfaces (SPI) each with
two Chip-Selects
•
Hardware IPIPE for Real-Time Image
Processing
Up to 14-bit CCD/CMOS Digital Interface
16-/8-bit Generic YcBcR-4:2 Interface
(BT.601)
One Master/Slave Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
Bus®
•
•
Two Audio Serial Port (ASP)
–
–
–
–
–
I2S and TDM I2S
AC97 Audio Codec Interface
S/PDIF via Software
Standard Voice Codec Interface (AIC12)
SPI Protocol (Master Mode Only)
•
•
•
•
10-/8-bit CCIR6565/BT655 Interface
Up to 75-MHz Pixel Clock
Histogram Module
Resize Engine
–
–
–
Resize Images From 1/16x to 8x
Separate Horizontal/Vertical Control
Two Simultaneous Output Paths
•
•
•
Four Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Outputs
Four RTO (Real Time Out) Outputs
Up to 104 General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
(Multiplexed with Other Device Functions)
On-Chip ARM ROM Bootloader (RBL) to Boot
From NAND Flash, MMC/SD, USB, or UART
Configurable Power-Saving Modes
–
Back End Provides:
•
•
Hardware On-Screen Display (OSD)
Composite NTSC/PAL video encoder
output
•
•
•
8-/16-bit YCC and Up to 18-Bit RGB666
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this document.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date.
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not
necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Copyright © 2009, Texas Instruments Incorporated
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
•
Crystal or External Clock Input (typically
24 MHz or 36 MHz)
4K-Bytes Trace Buffer memory
Device Revision ID Readable by ARM
–
•
•
Flexible PLL Clock Generators
Debug Interface Support
•
337-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package
(GCE Suffix), 0.65-mm Ball Pitch
–
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG)
Boundary-Scan-Compatible
ETB™ (Embedded Trace Buffer™) with
•
•
90nm Process Technology
3.3-V and 1.8-V I/O, 1.3-V Internal
–
1.2 SUPPORTS DEFENSE, AEROSPACE, AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Controlled Baseline
One Assembly/Test Site
One Fabrication Site
Available in Military (–55°C/125°C) Temperature Range(1)
Extended Product Life Cycle
Extended Product-Change Notification
Product Traceability
(1) Additional temperature ranges are available - contact factory
2
SM320DM355-EP Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
1.3 Description
The DM355 is a highly integrated, programmable platform for digital still camera, digital photo frames, IP
security cameras, 4-channel digital video recorders, video door bell application, and other low cost
portable digital video applications. Designed to offer portable video designers and manufacturers the
ability to produce affordable portable digital video solutions with high picture quality, the DM355 combines
high performance MPEG4 HD (720p) codecs and JPEG codecs up to 50M pixels per second, high quality,
and low power consumption at a very low price point. The DM355 also enables seamless interface to most
additional external devices required for a complete digital camera implementation. The interface is flexible
enough to support various types of CCD and CMOS sensors, signal conditioning circuits, power
management, DDR/mDDR memory, SRAM, NAND, shutter, Iris and auto-focus motor controls, etc.
The DM355 processor core is an ARM926EJ-S RISC processor. The ARM926EJ-S is a 32-bit processor
core that performs 32-bit and 16-bit instructions and processes 32-bit, 16-bit, and 8-bit data. The core
uses pipelining so that all parts of the processor and memory system can operate continuously. The ARM
core incorporates:
•
•
•
A coprocessor 15 (CP15) and protection module
Data and program Memory Management Units (MMUs) with table look-aside buffers.
Separate 16K-byte instruction and 8K-byte data caches. Both are four-way associative with virtual
index virtual tag (VIVT).
DM355 performance is enhanced by its MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor. The MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor
performs the computational operations required for image processing; JPEG compression and MPEG4
video and imaging standard. The MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor supports MPEG4 SP at HD (720p), D1,
VGA, SIF encode/decode resolutions and JPEG encode/decode up to 50M pixels per second.
The DM355 device has a Video Processing Subsystem (VPSS) with two configurable video/imaging
peripherals:
•
•
A Video Processing Front-End (VPFE)
A Video Processing Back-End (VPBE)
The VPFE port provides an interface for CCD/CMOS imager modules and video decoders. The VPBE
provides hardware On Screen Display (OSD) support and composite NTSC/PAL and digital LCD output.
The DM355 peripheral set includes:
•
•
•
•
•
An inter-integrated circuit (I2C) Bus interface
Two audio serial ports (ASP)
Three 64-bit general-purpose timers each configurable as two independent 32-bit timers
A 64-bit watchdog timer
Up to 104-pins of general-purpose input/output (GPIO) with programmable interrupt/event generation
modes, multiplexed with other peripherals
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Three UARTs with hardware handshaking support on one UART
Three serial port Interfaces (SPI)
Four pulse width modulator (PWM) peripherals
Four real time out (RTO) outputs
Two Multi-Media Card / Secure Digital (MMC/SD/SDIO) interfaces
Wireless interfaces (Bluetooth, WLAN, WUSB) through SDIO
A USB 2.0 full and high-speed device and host interface
Two external memory interfaces:
–
An asynchronous external memory interface (AEMIF) for slower memories/peripherals such as
NAND and OneNAND,
–
A high speed synchronous memory interface for DDR2/mDDR.
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
3
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
For software development support the DM355 has a complete set of ARM development tools which
include: C compilers, assembly optimizers to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windows™
debugger interface for visibility into source code execution.
4
SM320DM355-EP Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
1.4 Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the DM355 device.
CCD/
CMOS
Module
CCDC
IPIPE
H3A
VPFE
DDR
controller
Enhanced DMA
64 channels
DLL/
PHY
16 bit
DDR2/mDDR 16
10b
DAC
Composite video
Digital RGB/YUV
Video
Encoder
OSD
VPBE
VPSS
DMA/Data and configuration bus
USB2.0 PHY
ARM INTC
Nand/SM/
Async/One Nand
(AEMIF)
MPEG4/JPEG
Coprocessor
ARM926EJ-S_Z8
Speaker
microphone
ASP (2x)
MMC/SD (x2)
SPI I/F (x3)
UART (x3)
I2C
l-cache
16KB
RAM
32KB
D-cache
ROM
8KB
8KB
Timer/
WDT (x4 - 64)
GIO
PWM (x4)
RTO
Clocks
JTAG
I/F
CLOCK ctrl
PLLs
64bit DMA/Data Bus
Peripherals
32bit Configuration Bus
JTAG 24 MHz
27 MHz
or 36 MHz (optional)
Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
5
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Contents
4.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case
Temperature Range
1
SM320DM355-EP Digital Media System-on-Chip
(DMSoC) ................................................... 1
(Unless Otherwise Noted) ................................. 92
4.2 Recommended Operating Conditions............... 93
1.1 Features .............................................. 1
1.2
SUPPORTS DEFENSE, AEROSPACE, AND
4.3
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating Case
Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted) ............ 94
MEDICAL APPLICATIONS........................... 2
1.3 Description............................................ 3
1.4 Functional Block Diagram ............................ 5
Device Overview ......................................... 7
2.1 Device Characteristics................................ 7
2.2 Memory Map Summary............................... 8
2.3 Pin Assignments .................................... 10
2.4 Pin Functions........................................ 14
2.5 Pin List .............................................. 37
2.6 Device Support ...................................... 57
Detailed Device Description.......................... 58
3.1 ARM Subsystem Overview.......................... 58
3.2 ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU............................ 59
3.3 Memory Mapping.................................... 61
3.4 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC)................... 62
3.5 Device Clocking ..................................... 64
3.6 PLL Controller (PLLC)............................... 74
3.7 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC).................. 78
3.8 System Control Module ............................. 78
3.9 Pin Multiplexing...................................... 79
3.10 Device Reset ........................................ 80
3.11 Default Device Configurations....................... 81
3.12 Device Boot Modes ................................. 84
3.13 Power Management................................. 86
3.14 64-Bit Crossbar Architecture ........................ 88
3.15 MPEG4/JPEG Overview ............................ 91
Device Operating Conditions ........................ 92
5
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical
Specifications ........................................... 95
5.1
2
Parameter Information Device-Specific Information 95
Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition
Behavior ............................................. 97
5.2
5.3 Power Supplies...................................... 97
5.4 Reset ................................................ 99
5.5 Oscillators and Clocks ............................. 100
5.6
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)............. 105
3
5.7 External Memory Interface (EMIF)................. 107
5.8 MMC/SD ........................................... 114
5.9
Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) Overview . 116
5.10 USB 2.0 ............................................ 128
5.11 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
(UART) ............................................. 130
5.12 Serial Port Interface (SPI).......................... 132
5.13 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ....................... 135
5.14 Audio Serial Port (ASP)............................ 138
5.15 Timer............................................... 146
5.16 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)..................... 147
5.17 Real Time Out (RTO) .............................. 149
5.18 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG ................................ 150
Mechanical Data....................................... 153
6.1 Thermal Data for GCE ............................. 153
6.1.1 Packaging Information............................. 153
6
4
6
Contents
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
2 Device Overview
2.1 Device Characteristics
Table 2-1 provides an overview of the DMSoC. The table shows significant features of the device,
including the peripherals, capacity of on-chip RAM, ARM operating frequency, the package type with pin
count, etc.
Table 2-1. Characteristics of the Processor
HARDWARE FEATURES
DM355
DDR2 / mDDR Memory Controller
DDR2 / mDDR (16-bit bus width)
Asynchronous (8/16-bit bus width)
RAM, Flash (NAND, OneNAND)
Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF)
Flash Card Interfaces
EDMA
Two MMC/SD
One SmartMedia/xD
64 independent DMA channels
Eight EDMA channels
Three 64-Bit General Purpose (each
configurable as two separate 32-bit
timers)
Timers
Peripherals
One 64-Bit Watch Dog
Not all peripherals pins are
available at the same time
(For more detail, see the
Device Configuration
section).
Three (one with RTS and CTS flow
control)
UART
SPI
Three (each supports two slave
devices)
I2C
One (Master/Slave)
Two ASP
Audio Serial Port [ASP]
General-Purpose Input/Output Port
Pulse width modulator (PWM)
Up to 104
Four outputs
One Input (VPFE)
One Output (VPBE)
Configurable Video Ports
USB 2.0
High, Full Speed Device
High, Full, Low Speed Host
ARM
On-Chip CPU Memory
JTAG BSDL_ID
Organization
16-KB I-cache, 8-KB D-cache,
32-KB RAM, 8-KB ROM
JTAGID register (address location: 0x01C4 0028)
0x0B73B01F
ARM 135, 216 (1), and 270 MHz
1.3 V
CPU Frequency (Maximum) MHz
Core (V)
Voltage
I/O (V)
3.3 V, 1.8 V
Reference frequency options
Configurable PLL controller
24 MHz (typical), 36 MHz
PLL bypass, programmable PLL
PLL Options
BGA Package
13 x 13 mm
337-Pin BGA (GCE)
90 nm
Process Technology
Product Preview (PP),
Advance Information (AI),
or Production Data (PD)
Product Status(2)
PD
(1) Extended temperature supported for A216 devices.
(2) PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
7
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
2.2 Memory Map Summary
Table 2-3 shows the memory map address ranges of the device. Table 2-3 depicts the expanded map of
the Configuration Space (0x01C0 0000 through 0x01FF FFFF). The device has multiple on-chip memories
associated with its processor and various subsystems. To help simplify software development a unified
memory map is used where possible to maintain a consistent view of device resources across all bus
masters. The bus masters are the ARM, EDMA, USB, and VPSS.
Table 2-2. DM355 Memory Map
Start Address
0x0000 0000
0x0000 4000
0x0000 8000
End Address
0x0000 3FFF
0x0000 7FFF
0x0000 FFFF
Size (Bytes)
ARM
Mem Map
EDMA
Mem Map
USB
Mem Map
VPSS
Mem Map
16K
ARM RAM0
(Instruction)
16K
ARM RAM1
(Instruction)
Reserved
Reserved
32K
ARM ROM
(Instruction)
- only 8K used
0x0001 0000
0x0001 4000
0x0001 8000
0x0001 3FFF
0x0001 7FFF
0x0001 FFFF
16K
16K
32K
ARM RAM0 (Data)
ARM RAM1 (Data)
ARM RAM0
ARM RAM1
ARM ROM
ARM RAM0
ARM RAM1
ARM ROM
ARM ROM (Data)
- only 8K used
0x0002 0000
0x0010 0000
0x01BC 0000
0x01BC 1000
0x01BC 1800
0x01BC 1900
0x01BD 0000
0x01C0 0000
0x000F FFFF
0x01BB FFFF
0x01BC 0FFF
0x01BC 17FF
0x01BC 18FF
0x01BC FFFF
0x01BF FFFF
0x01FF FFFF
896K
26M
4K
Reserved
ARM ETB Mem
ARM ETB Reg
ARM IceCrusher
Reserved
2K
Reserved
256
Reserved
59136
192K
4M
CFG Bus
Peripherals
CFG Bus
Peripherals
Reserved
0x0200 0000
0x0A00 0000
0x11F0 0000
0x11F2 0000
0x2000 0000
0x09FF FFFF
0x11EF FFFF
0x11F1 FFFF
0x1FFF FFFF
0x2000 7FFF
128M
127M - 16K
128K
ASYNC EMIF (Data) ASYNC EMIF (Data)
Reserved
Reserved
141M-64K
32K
DDR EMIF Control
Regs
DDR EMIF Control
Regs
0x2000 8000
0x4200 0000
0x4A00 0000
0x8000 0000
0x9000 0000
0x41FF FFFF
0x49FF FFFF
0x7FFF FFFF
0x8FFF FFFF
0xFFFF FFFF
544M-32K
128M
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
DDR EMIF
Reserved
Reserved
864M
256M
DDR EMIF
Reserved
DDR EMIF
Reserved
DDR EMIF
Reserved
1792M
Table 2-3. DM355 ARM Configuration Bus Access to Peripherals
Address
Accessibility
Region
Start
End
Size
64K
1K
ARM
EDMA
EDMA CC
EDMA TC0
EDMA TC1
Reserved
Reserved
UART0
0x01C0 0000
0x01C1 0000
0x01C1 0400
0x01C1 0800
0x01C1 A000
0x01C2 0000
0x01C0 FFFF
0x01C1 03FF
0x01C1 07FF
0x01C1 9FFF
0x01C1 FFFF
0x01C2 03FF
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1K
38K
24K
1K
8
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-3. DM355 ARM Configuration Bus Access to Peripherals (continued)
Address
0x01C2 07FF
Accessibility
UART1
0x01C2 0400
0x01C2 0800
0x01C2 0C00
0x01C2 1000
0x01C2 1400
0x01C2 1800
0x01C2 1C00
0x01C2 2000
0x01C2 2400
0x01C2 2800
0x01C2 2C00
0x01C4 0000
0x01C4 0800
0x01C4 0C00
0x01C4 1000
0x01C4 2000
0x01C4 8000
0x01C4 8400
0x01C6 4000
0x01C6 6000
0x01C6 6800
0x01C6 7000
0x01C6 7800
0x01C7 0000
0x01C7 0000
0x01C7 0080
0x01C7 0100
0x01C7 0200
0x01C7 0300
0x01C7 0400
0x01C7 0600
0x01C7 0800
0x01C7 0900
0x01C7 1000
0x01C7 4000
0x01E0 0000
0x01E0 2000
0x01E0 4000
0x01E0 6000
0x01E0 6400
0x01E1 0000
0x01E1 1000
0x01E2 0000
0x0200 0000
0x0400 0000
0x0600 0000
0x0A00 0000
1K
1K
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Timer4/5
0x01C2 0BFF
0x01C2 0FFF
0x01C2 13FF
0x01C2 17FF
0x01C2 1BFF
0x01C2 1FFF
0x01C2 23FF
0x01C2 27FF
0x01C2 2BFF
0x01C2 2FFF
0x01C4 07FF
0x01C4 0BFF
0x01C4 0FFF
0x01C4 1FFF
0x01C4 7FFF
0x01C4 83FF
0x01C6 3FFF
0x01C6 5FFF
0x01C6 67FF
0x01C6 6FFF
0x01C6 77FF
0x01C6 FFFF
0x01C7 FFFF
0x01C7 007F
0x01C7 00FF
0x01C7 01FF
0x01C7 02FF
0x01C7 03FF
0x01C7 05FF
0x01C7 07FF
0x01C7 08FF
0x01C7 09FF
0x01C7 3FFF
0x01CD FFFF
0x01E0 1FFF
0x01E0 3FFF
0x01E0 5FFF
0x01E0 63FF
0x01E0 FFFF
0x01E1 0FFF
0x01E1 FFFF
0x01FF FFFF
0x03FF FFFF
0x05FF FFFF
0x09FF FFFF
0x0BFF FFFF
Real-time out
I2C
1K
1K
Timer0/1
1K
Timer2/3
1K
WatchDog Timer
PWM0
1K
1K
PWM1
1K
PWM2
1K
PWM3
1K
System Module
PLL Controller 0
PLL Controller 1
Power/Sleep Controller
Reserved
2K
1K
1K
4K
24K
1K
ARM Interrupt Controller
Reserved
111K
8K
USB OTG 2.0 Regs / RAM
SPI0
2K
SPI1
2K
GPIO
2K
SPI2
2K
VPSS Subsystem
VPSS Clock Control
Hardware 3A
Image Pipe (IPIPE) Interface
On Screen Display
Reserved
64K
128
128
256
256
256
512
256
256
256
12K
432K
8K
Video Encoder
CCD Controller
VPSS Buffer Logic
Reserved
Image Pipe (IPIPE)
Reserved
Multimedia / SD 1
ASP0
8K
ASP1
8K
UART2
1K
Reserved
39K
4K
ASYNC EMIF Control
Multimedia / SD 0
Reserved
60K
1792K
32M
32M
64M
32M
ASYNC EMIF Data (CE0)
ASYNC EMIF Data (CE1)
Reserved
Reserved
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
9
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-3. DM355 ARM Configuration Bus Access to Peripherals (continued)
Address
0x0FFF FFFF
Accessibility
Reserved
0x0C00 0000
64M
√
√
2.3 Pin Assignments
Extensive use of pin multiplexing is used to accommodate the largest number of peripheral functions in
the smallest possible package. Pin multiplexing is controlled using a combination of hardware
configuration at device reset and software programmable register settings.
2.3.1 Pin Map (Bottom View)
Figure 2-1 through Figure 2-4 show the pin assignments in four quadrants (A, B, C, and D). Note that
micro-vias are not required. Contact your TI representative for routing recommendations.
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
CIN0
VCLK
CIN3
CIN2
VREF
DDA33_USB
SSA_PLL2
J
RSV01
SS
SS
SS
SS
V
V
SS
LCD_OE
H
FIELD
NC
DDA13_USB
DDA_PLL2
CV
V
VFB
TVOUT
IOUT
EXTCLK
COUT1
COUT3
COUT4
YOUT7
YOUT4
VSYNC
HSYNC
V
G
F
SS
DD
SS
DD
V
V
IBIAS
COUT0
COUT2
V
V
DD_VOUT
DD_VOUT
EMU0
TMS
DD_VOUT
DD
USB_VBUS
V
EMU1
TDO
TDI
E
D
C
SS
V
SS_USB
SS_USB
V
SS
COUT6
COUT7
YOUT3
USB_ID
V
USB_DRV
VBUS
V
V
SS_USB_REF
CV
DD
USB_R1
COUT5
YOUT0
DDD13_USB
TRST
MXO1
V
V
DDA33_USB_
PLL
SS_USB
V
V
YOUT5
B
A
SS
SS
CV
DD
V
V
YOUT1
2
YOUT2
3
YOUT6
4
USB_DM
USB_DP
MXI1
9
SS
SS
1
5
6
7
8
Figure 2-1. Pin Map [Quadrant A]
10
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
V
DDR_A02
DDR_A03
DDR_A05
DDR_A08
DDR_A09
DDR_A11
DDR_CLK
W
V
U
T
DDR_CLK
SS
SS
SS
DDR_BA[2]
DDR_BA[0]
DDR_CS
V
V
DDR_CAS
DDR_A00
DDR_A01
DDR_A04
DDR_A07
DDR_A06
DDR_A10
DDR_A13
DDR_RAS
DDR_A12
DDR_BA[1]
V
SS
V
V
SS
V
SS
SS
V
SS
V
MXO2
MXI2
PCLK
YIN3
YIN4
CIN7
CIN5
CIN1
DDR_ZN
SS
V
SS
V
CV
DD
CV
DD
V
CAM_VD
CAM_WEN_
FIELD
R
P
N
M
L
SS
DD_DDR
V
V
V
V
V
YIN1
YIN2
YIN0
CAM_HD
YIN5
DD_VIN
DD_VIN
DD_VIN
DD_DDR
SS_MX2
V
CV
DD
V
V
RSV05
RSV06
SS
SS
SS
V
V
SS
V
SS
V
SS
RSV04
RSV03
RSV02
YIN6
CIN4
DD_DDR
V
V
V
V
SS
V
YIN7
DDA18V_DAC
DD
SS_DAC
SS
CV
DD
V
V
V
RSV07
CIN6
K
DD
SS
SS
Figure 2-2. Pin Map [Quadrant B]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
11
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DDR_
DQGATE0
DDR_DQ10
DDR_DQ11
DDR_DQ13
DDR_DQ15
CV
DDR_WE
DDR_DQ01
DDR_DQ05
DDR_DQ07
W
V
U
T
DD
DDR_
DQGATE1
DDR_DQ00
DDR_DQ02
DDR_DQ03
DDR_DQS[0]
DDR_DQS[1]
DDR_DQM[1]
DDR_DQ14
DDR_DQ12
V
SS
DDR_CKE
DDR_DQ06
DDR_DQ08
DDR_DQ09
EM_A13
EM_A12
EM_A08
EM_A05
EM_BA1
EM_BA0
EM_D14
EM_D10
EM_D07
DDR_VREF
UART0_RXD
UART0_TXD
EM_A10
V
V
SS
DDR_DQ04
SS
V
DDR_DQM[0]
V
SS
CV
DD
DD_DDR
V
V
V
UART1_RXD
EM_A04
UART1_TXD
EM_A09
I2C_SDA
I2C_SCL
EM_A11
EM_A07
DDA33_DDRDLL
SSA_DLL
DD_DDR
R
P
N
M
L
V
V
V
V
V
EM_A06
DD_DDR
DD_DDR
DD_DDR
DD_DDR
DD_DDR
V
V
V
EM_A02
EM_A01
EM_A03
DD
SS
DD
V
V
V
V
V
SS
V
EM_D13
EM_D04
EM_A00
EM_D08
EM_D15
DD
DD
DD
SS
DD
CV
DD
V
DD
V
V
CV
DD
EM_D11
EM_D06
EM_D12
SS
SS
V
CV
DD
CV
DD
V
V
DD
EM_D09
SS
SS
K
Figure 2-3. Pin Map [Quadrant C]
12
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
CV
CV
CV
CV
V
V
V
V
EM_WE
EM_CE0
EM_ADV
EM_D01
EM_D03
EM_D00
EM_D05
EM_D02
DD
DD
DD
DD
SS
J
SS
V
V
V
ASP0_DX
CV
DD
CV
SSA_PLL1
SS
SS
H
G
F
DD
CV
ASP0_FSX
ASP0_CLKR
ASP1_FSR
ASP1_CLKS
GIO007
GIO003
GIO002
EM_WAIT
ASP0_CLKX
ASP0_DR
EM_CE1
EM_OE
DDA_PLL1
DD
DD
V
DD
V
DD
V
V
V
ASP0_FSR
ASP1_FSX
DD
DD
DD
SPI1_
SDENA[0]
V
TCK
RTCK
RESET
SPI1_SDO
CLKOUT1
SPI0_SCLK
GIO001
EM_CLK
ASP1_CLKX
ASP1_DR
SS
E
D
C
B
A
MMCSD0_
DATA1
ASP1_CLKR
ASP1_DX
GIO005
V
SPI1_SCLK MMCSD0_CMD MMCSD1_CLK
CLKOUT3
SPI0_SDO
GIO000
SS_MX1
MMCSD0_
DATA0
MMCSD1_
DATA1
MMCSD1_
DATA3
SPI0_
SDENA[0]
MMCSD0_
DATA2
V
CV
DD
GIO004
GIO006
SS
MMCSD0_
DATA3
MMCSD0_
CLK
MMCSD1_
DATA2
MMCSD1_
CMD
MMCSD1_
DATA0
CV
SPI0_SDI
12
SPI1_SDI
13
V
CLKOUT2
11
DD
SS
10
14
15
16
17
18
19
Figure 2-4. Pin Map [Quadrant D]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
13
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
2.4 Pin Functions
The pin functions tables (Table 2-4 through Table 2-22) identify the external signal names, the associated
pin (ball) numbers along with the mechanical package designator, the pin type, whether the pin has any
internal pullup or pulldown resistors, and a functional pin description. For more detailed information on
device configuration, peripheral selection, multiplexed/shared pins, and debugging considerations, see
Section 3. For the list of all pin in chronological order see Section 2.5
2.4.1 Image Data Input - Video Processing Front End
The CCD Controller module in the Video Processing Front End has an external signal interface for image
data input. It supports YUV (YC) inputs as well as Bayer RGB and complementary input signals (I.e.,
image data input).
The definition of the CCD controller data input signals depend on the input mode selected.
•
In 16-bit YCbCr mode, the Cb and Cr signals are multiplexed on the Cl signals and the order is
configurable (i.e., Cb first or Cr first).
•
In 8-bit YCbCr mode, the Y, Cb, and Cr signals are multiplexed and not only is the order selectable,
but also the half of the bus used.
Table 2-4. CCD Controller Signals for Each Input Mode
PIN NAME
Cl7
CCD
16-BIT YCbCr
Cb7,Cr7
Cb6,Cr6
Cb5,Cr5
Cb4,Cr4
Cb3,Cr3
Cb2,Cr2
Cb1,Cr1
Cb0,Cr0
Y7
8-BIT YCbCr
Y7,Cb7,Cr7
Y6,Cb6,Cr6
Y5,Cb5,Cr5
Y4,Cb4,Cr4
Y3,Cb3,Cr3
Y2,Cb2,Cr2
Y1,Cb1,Cr1
Y0,Cb0,Cr0
Y7,Cb7,Cr7
Y6,Cb6,Cr6
Y5,Cb5,Cr5
Y4,Cb4,Cr4
Y3,Cb3,Cr3
Y2,Cb2,Cr2
Y1,Cb1,Cr1
Y0,Cb0,Cr0
Cl6
Cl5
CCD13
CCD12
CCD11
CCD10
CCD9
CCD8
CCD7
CCD6
CCD5
CCD4
CCD3
CCD2
CCD1
CCD0
Cl4
Cl3
Cl2
Cl1
Cl0
Yl7
Yl6
Y6
Yl5
Y5
Yl4
Y4
Yl3
Y3
Yl2
Y2
Yl1
Y1
Yl0
Y0
14
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-5. CCD Controller/Video Input Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Standard CCD/CMOS input: NOT USED
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[07]
CIN7/
GIO101/
SPI2_SCLK
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[07]
N3
I/O/Z
SPI: SPI2 Clock
GIO: GIO[101]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: NOT USED
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[06]
CIN6/
GIO100/
SPI2_SDO
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[06]
K5
M3
L4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
SPI: SPI2 Data Out
GIO: GIO[100]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[13]
CIN5/
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[05]
GIO099/
SPI2_SDEN
A[0]
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[05]
SPI: SPI2 Chip Select
GIO: GIO[099]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[12]
CIN4/
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[04]
GIO098/
SPI2_SDEN
A[1]
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[04]
SPI: SPI2 Data In
GIO: GIO[098]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[11]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[03]
CIN3/
GIO097/
PD
VDD_VIN
J4
J5
L3
J3
L5
M4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[03]
GIO: GIO[097]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[10]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[02]
CIN2/
GIO096/
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[02]
GIO: GIO[097]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[09]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[01]
CIN1/
GIO095/
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[01]
GIO: GIO[095]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[08]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: CB/CR[00]
CIN0/
GIO094/
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[00]
GIO: GIO[094]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[07]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[07]
YIN7/
GIO093
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[07]
GIO: GIO[093]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[06]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[06]
YIN6/
GIO092
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[06]
GIO: GIO[092]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) PD = internal pull-down, PU = internal pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
(3) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
15
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-5. CCD Controller/Video Input Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[05]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[05]
YIN5/
GIO091
PD
VDD_VIN
M5
I/O/Z
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[05]
GIO: GIO[091]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[04]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[04]
YIN4/
GIO090
PD
VDD_VIN
P3
R3
P4
P2
P5
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[04]
GIO: GIO[090]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[03]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[03]
YIN3/
GIO089
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[03]
GIO: GIO[089]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[02]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[02]
YIN2/
GIO088
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[02]
GIO: GIO[088]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[01]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[01]
YIN1/
GIO087
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[01]
GIO: GIO[087]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[00]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: Time multiplexed between chroma: Y[00]
YIN0/
GIO086
PD
VDD_VIN
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel. Y/CB/CR[00]
GIO: GIO[086]
Horizontal synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an
output (master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new line starts.
GIO: GIO[085]
CAM_HD/
GIO085
PD
VDD_VIN
N5
R4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
Vertical synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an output
(master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new frame starts.
GIO: GIO[084]
CAM_VD
GIO084
PD
VDD_VIN
Write enable input signal is used by external device (AFE/TG) to gate the DDR
output of the CCDC module. Alternately, the field identification input signal is used
by external device (AFE/TG) to indicate which of two frames is input to the CCDC
module for sensors with interlaced output. CCDC handles 1- or 2-field sensors in
hardware.
CAM_WEN
_FIELD\
GIO083
PD
VDD_VIN
R5
T3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
GIO: GIO[083]
PCLK/
GIO082
PD
VDD_VIN
Pixel clock input (strobe for lines C17 through Y10)
GIO: GIO[0082]
2.4.2 Image Data Output - Video Processing Back End (VPBE)
The Video Encoder/Digital LCD interface module in the video processing back end has an external signal
interface for digital image data output as described in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8.
The digital image data output signals support multiple functions / interfaces, depending on the display
mode selected. The following table describes these modes. Parallel RGB mode with more than RGB565
signals requires enabling pin multiplexing to support (i.e., for RGB666 mode).
16
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-6. Signals for VPBE Display Modes
PIN NAME
YCC16
HSYNC
YCC8/
REC656
PRGB
SRGB
HSYNC
HSYNC
GIO073
HSYNC
HSYNC
VSYNC
GIO072
VSYNC
VSYNC
VSYNC
VSYNC
LCD_OE
GIO071
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
As needed
FIELD
GIO070
R2
PWM3C
EXTCLK
GIO069
B2
As needed
VCLK
As needed
VCLK
As needed
VCLK
As needed
VCLK
PWM3D
VCLK
GIO068
YOUT7
YOUT6
YOUT5
YOUT4
YOUT3
YOUT2
YOUT1
YOUT0
Y7
Y6
Y5
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
Y0
C7
Y7,Cb7,Cr7
Y6,Cb6,Cr6
Y5,Cb5,Cr5
Y4,Cb4,Cr4
Y3,Cb3,Cr3
Y2,Cb2,Cr2
Y1,Cb1,Cr1
Y0,Cb0,Cr0
LCD_AC
R7
R6
R5
R4
R3
G7
G6
G5
G4
Data7
Data6
Data5
Data4
Data3
Data2
Data1
Data0
LCD_AC
COUT7
GIO081
PWM0
COUT6
GIO080
PWM1
C6
C5
LCD_OE
BRIGHT
G3
G2
LCD_OE
BRIGHT
COUT5
GIO079
PWM2A
RTO0
COUT4
GIO078
PWM2B
RTO1
C4
C3
C2
PWM
CSYNC
-
B7
B6
B5
PWM
CSYNC
-
COUT3
GIO077
PWM2C
RTO2
COUT2
GIO076
PWM2D
RTO3
COUT1
GIO075
PWM3A
C1
C0
-
-
B4
B3
-
-
COUT0
GIO074
PWM3B
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
17
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-7. Digital Video Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
NAME
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION(4)
NO.
C3
A4
B4
B3
B2
A3
A2
B1
YOUT7-R7
YOUT6-R6
YOUT5-R5
YOUT4-R4
YOUT3-R3
YOUT2-G7
YOUT1-G6
YOUT0-G5
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
COUT7-
G4/GIO081
/PWM0
C2
D2
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[081] PWM0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[080] PWM1
COUT6-G3
/GIO080
/PWM1
VDD_VOUT
COUT5-G2
/ GIO079 /
PWM2A /
RTO0
C1
D3
E3
E4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079] PWM2A RTO0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078] PWM2B RTO1
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077] PWM2C RTO2
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076] PWM2D RTO3
COUT4-B7 /
GIO078 /
PWM2B /
RTO1
COUT3-B6 /
GIO077 /
PWM2C /
RTO2
COUT2-B5 /
GIO076 /
PWM2D /
RTO3
COUT1-B4 /
GIO075 /
PWM3A
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
GIO: GIO[075]
PWM3A
F3
F4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
COUT0-B3 /
GIO074 /
PWM3B
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function
GIO: GIO[074]
PWM3B
VDD_VOUT
HSYNC /
GIO073
PD
VDD_VOUT
Video Encoder: Horizontal Sync
GIO: GIO[073]
F5
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VSYNC /
GIO072
PD
VDD_VOUT
Video Encoder: Vertical Sync
GIO: GIO[072]
G5
FIELD /
GIO070 /
R2 /
Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced display formats
GIO: GIO[070]
Digital Video Out: R2
PWM3C
H4
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PWM3C
Video Encoder: External clock input, used if clock rates > 27 MHz are needed, e.g.
74.25 MHz for HDTV digital output
GIO: GIO[069]
Digital Video Out: B2
PWM3D
EXTCLK /
GIO069 /
B2 /
PD
VDD_VOUT
G3
H3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
PWM3D
VCLK /
GIO068
Video Encoder: Video Output Clock
GIO: GIO[068]
VDD_VOUT
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
(4) To reduce EMI and reflections, depending on the trace length, approximately 22 Ω to 50 Ω damping resistors are recommend on the
following outputs placed near the DM355: YOUT(0-7),COUT(0-7), HSYNC,VSYNC,LCD_OE,FIELD,EXTCLK,VCLK. The trace lengths
should be minimized.
18
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-8. Analog Video Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1) OTHER(2) DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Video DAC: Reference voltage output (0.45V, 0.1uF to GND). When the DAC is not
used, the VREF signal should be connected to VSS
VREF
J7
A I/O/Z
A I/O/Z
.
Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC output (1000 ohm to VFB). When the DAC is not
used, the IOUT signal should be connected to VSS
IOUT
IBIAS
VFB
E1
F2
G1
F1
.
Video DAC: External resistor (2550 Ohms to GND) connection for current bias
configuration. When the DAC is not used, the IBIAS signal should be connected to
A I/O/Z
A I/O/Z
A I/O/Z
VSS
.
Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC output (1000 Ohms to IOUT, 1070 Ohms to
TVOUT). When the DAC is not used, the VFB signal should be connected to VSS
.
Video DAC: Analog Composite NTSC/PAL output (SeeFigure 5-31 andFigure 5-32 for
circuit connection). When the DAC is not used, the TVOUT signal should be left as a
TVOUT
V
No Connect or connected to VSS
Video DAC: Analog 1.8V power. When the DAC is not used, the VDDA18_DAC signal
should be connected to VSS
Video DAC: Analog 1.8V ground. When the DAC is not used, the VSSA_DAC signal
should be connected to VSS
.
VDDA18_DAC
VSSA_DAC
L7
L8
PWR
GND
.
.
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal. Specifies the operating I/O supply
voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(2) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
2.4.3 Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF)
The Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF) signals support AEMIF, NAND, and OneNAND.
Table 2-9. Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[13]
GIO: GIO[67]
System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method. Used
to drive boot status LED signal (active low) in ROM boot modes.
EM_A13/
GIO067/
BTSEL[1]
PD
VDD
V19
I/O/Z
EM_A12/
GIO066/
BTSEL[0]
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[12]
GIO: GIO[66]
System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method.
PD
VDD
U19
R16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[11]
GIO: GIO[65]
AECFG[3:0] sampled at power-on-reset to AECFG configuration. AECFG[3] sets
default for PinMux2_EM_D15_8: AEMIF default bus width (16 or 8 bits)
EM_A11/
GIO065/
AECFG[3]
PU
VDD
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[10]
EM_A10/
GIO064/
AECFG[2]
GIO: GIO[64]
PU
VDD
R18
P17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
AECFG[3:0] sampled at power-on-reset to AECFG configuration. AECFG[2:1]
sets default for PinMux2_EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0 definition (EM_BA0,
EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[09]
GIO: GIO[63]
AECFG[3:0] sampled at power-on-reset to AECFG configuration. AECFG[2:1]
sets default for PinMux2_EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0 definition (EM_BA0,
EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)
EM_A09/
GIO063/
AECFG[1]
PD
VDD
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[08]
GIO: GIO[62]
AECFG[0] sets default for:
EM_A08/
GIO062/
AECFG[0]
PU
VDD
T19
P16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
•
•
PinMux2_EM_A0_BA1: AEMIF address width (OneNAND or NAND)
PinMux2_EM_A13_3: AEMIF address width (OneNAND or NAND)
EM_A07/
GIO061
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[07]
GIO: GIO[61]
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
19
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-9. Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
EM_A06/
GIO060
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[06]
GIO: GIO[60]
P18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
EM_A05/
GIO059
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[05]
GIO: GIO[59]
R19
P15
N18
N15
N17
M16
EM_A04/
GIO058
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[04]
GIO: GIO[58]
EM_A03/
GIO057
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[03]
GIO: GIO[57]
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[02]
NAND/SM/xD: CLE - Command latch enable output
EM_A02/
EM_A01/
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[01]
NAND/SM/xD: ALE - Address latch enable output
EM_A00/
GIO056
Async EMIF: Address bus bit[00]
GIO: GIO[56]
Async EMIF: Bank address 1 signal - 16-bit address:
EM_BA1/
GIO055
•
In 16-bit mode, lowest address bit.
P19
N19
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
•
In 8-bit mode, second lowest address bit.
GIO: GIO[055]
Async EMIF: Bank address 0 signal - 8-bit address:
EM_BA0/
GIO054
EM_A14
•
In 8-bit mode, lowest address bit. or can be used as an extra address line
(bit14) when using 16-bit memories.
VDD
GIO: GIO[054]
EM_D15/
GIO053
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 15
GIO: GIO[053]
M18
M19
M15
L18
L17
L19
K18
L16
K19
K17
J19
L15
J18
H19
J17
H18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
EM_D14/
GIO052
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 14
GIO: GIO[052]
EM_D13/
GIO051
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 13
GIO: GIO[051]
EM_D12/
GIO050
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 12
GIO: GIO[050]
EM_D11/
GIO049
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 11
GIO: GIO[049]
EM_D10/
GIO048
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 10
GIO: GIO[048]
EM_D09/
GIO047
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 09
GIO: GIO[047]
EM_D08/
GIO046
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 08
GIO: GIO[046]
EM_D07/
GIO045
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 07
GIO: GIO[045]
EM_D06/
GIO044
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 06
GIO: GIO[044]
EM_D05/
GIO043
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 05
GIO: GIO[043]
EM_D04/
GIO042
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 04
GIO: GIO[042]
EM_D03/
GIO041
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 03
GIO: GIO[041]
EM_D02/
GIO040
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 02
GIO: GIO[040]
EM_D01/
GIO039
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 01
GIO: GIO[039]
EM_D00/
GIO038
Async EMIF: Data bus bit 00
GIO: GIO[038]
20
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-9. Asynchronous EMIF/NAND/OneNAND Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Async EMIF: Lowest numbered chip select. Can be programmed to be used for
standard asynchronous memories (example: flash), OneNAND, or NAND
memory. Used for the default boot and ROM boot modes.
GIO: GIO[037]
EM_CE0/
GIO037
J16
I/O/Z
VDD
Async EMIF: Second chip select. Can be programmed to be used for standard
asynchronous memories(example: flash), OneNAND, or NAND memory.
GIO: GIO[036]
EM_CE1/
GIO036
G19
J15
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
Async EMIF: Write Enable
NAND/SM/xD: WE (Write Enable) output
GIO: GIO[035]
EM_WE/
GIO035
Async EMIF: Output Enable
NAND/SM/xD: RE (Read Enable) output
GIO: GIO[034]
EM_OE/
GIO034
F19
G18
Async EMIF: Async WAIT
NAND/SM/xD: RDY/ BSY input
GIO: GIO[033]
EM_WAIT/
GIO033
EM_ADV/
GIO032
OneNAND: Address valid detect for OneNAND interface
GIO: GIO[032]
H16
E19
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
EM_CLK/
GIO031
OneNAND: Clock for OneNAND flash interface
GIO: GIO[031]
2.4.4 DDR Memory Interface
The DDR EMIF supports DDR2 and mobile DDR.
Table 2-10. DDR Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
W9
W8
T6
DDR_CLK
DDR_CLK
DDR_RAS
DDR_CAS
DDR_WE
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
DDR Data Clock
DDR Complementary Data Clock
DDR Row Address Strobe
DDR Column Address Strobe
DDR Write Enable
V9
W10
T8
DDR_CS
DDR Chip Select
DDR_CKE
DDR_DQM[1]
V10
U15
DDR Clock Enable
Data mask outputs:
•
•
DDR_DQM[1] - For DDR_DQ[15:8]
DDR_DQM[0] - For DDR_DQ[7:0]
DDR_DQM[0]
DDR_DQS[1]
T12
V15
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
Data strobe input/outputs for each byte of the 16-bit data bus used to
synchronize the data transfers. Output to DDR when writing and inputs when
reading.
DDR_DQS[0]
V12
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
•
•
DDR_DQS[1] - For DDR_DQ[15:8]
DDR_DQS[0] - For DDR_DQ[7:0]
DDR_BA[2]
DDR_BA[1]
DDR_BA[0]
DDR_A13
DDR_A12
DDR_A11
DDR_A10
V8
U7
U8
U6
V7
W7
V6
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
Bank select outputs. Two are required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.
Bank select outputs. Two are required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.
Bank select outputs. Two are required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.
DDR Address Bus bit 13
DDR Address Bus bit 12
DDR Address Bus bit 11
DDR Address Bus bit 10
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
21
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-10. DDR Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
W6
DDR_A09
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
DDR Address Bus bit 09
DDR Address Bus bit 08
DDR Address Bus bit 07
DDR Address Bus bit 06
DDR Address Bus bit 05
DDR Address Bus bit 04
DDR Address Bus bit 03
DDR Address Bus bit 02
DDR Address Bus bit 01
DDR Address Bus bit 00
DDR Data Bus bit 15
DDR Data Bus bit 14
DDR Data Bus bit 13
DDR Data Bus bit 12
DDR Data Bus bit 11
DDR Data Bus bit 10
DDR Data Bus bit 09
DDR Data Bus bit 08
DDR Data Bus bit 07
DDR Data Bus bit 06
DDR Data Bus bit 05
DDR Data Bus bit 04
DDR Data Bus bit 03
DDR Data Bus bit 02
DDR Data Bus bit 01
DDR Data Bus bit 00
DDR_A08
W5
DDR_A07
V5
DDR_A06
U5
DDR_A05
W4
DDR_A04
V4
DDR_A03
W3
DDR_A02
W2
DDR_A01
V3
DDR_A00
V2
DDR_DQ15
DDR_DQ14
DDR_DQ13
DDR_DQ12
DDR_DQ11
DDR_DQ10
DDR_DQ09
DDR_DQ08
DDR_DQ07
DDR_DQ06
DDR_DQ05
DDR_DQ04
DDR_DQ03
DDR_DQ02
DDR_DQ01
DDR_DQ00
W17
V16
W16
U16
W15
W14
V14
U13
W13
V13
W12
U12
T11
U11
W11
V11
DDR_
DQGATE0
DDR: Loopback signal for external DQS gating. Route to DDR and back to
DDR_DQGATE1 with same constraints as used for DDR clock and data.
W18
V17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VSSA_DLL
DDR_
DQGATE1
DDR: Loopback signal for external DQS gating. Route to DDR and back to
DDR_DQGATE0 with same constraints as used for DDR clock and data.
DDR: Voltage input for the SSTL_18 I/O buffers. Note even in the case of
mDDR an external resistor divider connected to this pin is necessary.
DDR_VREF
VSSA_DLL
U10
R11
R10
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
DDR: Ground for the DDR DLL
VDDA33_DDRDL
L
VDDA33_DDRDLL
DDR: Power (3.3 V) for the DDR DLL
DDR: Reference output for drive strength calibration of N and P channel
outputs. Tie to ground via 50 ohm resistor @ 0.5% tolerance.
DDR_ZN
T9
I/O/Z
VDD_DDR
22
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
2.4.5 GPIO
The General Purpose I/O signals provide generic I/O to external devices. Most of the GIO signals are
multiplexed with other functions.
Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
GIO:GIO[000] is sampled at reset and stored in the GIO0_RESET bit of the
BOOTCFG register.
Active low during MMC/SD boot (can be used as MMC/SD power control).
Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.
GIO000
C16
I/O/Z
VDD
GIO001
GIO002
GIO003
GIO004
GIO005
GIO006
E14
F15
G15
B17
D15
B18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
GIO: GIO[001] Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.
GIO: GIO[002] Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.
GIO: GIO[003] Can be used as external clock input for Timer 3.
GIO: GIO[004]
GIO: GIO[005]
GIO: GIO[006]
GIO007 /
SPI0_SDE
NA[1]
GIO: GIO[007]
SPI0: Chip Select 1
C17
E12
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
SPI1_SD
O /
GIO008
SPI1: Data Out
GIO: GIO[008]
VDD
SPI1_SDI
/ GIO009 /
SPI1_SDE
NA[1]
A13
I/O/Z
VDD
SPI1: Data In -OR- SPI1: Chip Select 1 GIO: GIO[009]
SPI1_SCL
K /
GIO010
SPI1: Clock GIO:
GIO[010]
C13
E13
R17
R15
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
SPI1_SDE
NA[0] /
GIO011
SPI1: Chip Select 0
GIO: GIO[011]
UART1_T
XD /
GIO012
UART1: Transmit Data
GIO: GIO[012]
UART1_R
XD /
GIO013
UART1: Receive Data
GIO: GIO[013]
I2C_SCL /
GIO014
I2C: Serial Clock GIO:
GIO[014]
R14
R13
C11
A11
D12
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
I2C_SDA /
GIO015
I2C: Serial Data
GIO: GIO[015]
CLKOUT3
/ GIO016
CLKOUT: Output Clock 3
GIO: GIO[016]
CLKOUT2
/ GIO017
CLKOUT: Output Clock 2
GIO: GIO[017]
CLKOUT1
/ GIO018
CLKOUT: Output Clock 1
GIO: GIO[018]
MMCSD1
_DATA0 /
GIO019 /
UART2_T
XD
MMCSD1: DATA0
GIO: GIO[019]
UART2: Transmit Data
A18
I/O/Z
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
23
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
MMCSD1
_DATA1 /
GIO020 /
UART2_R
XD
MMCSD1: DATA1
GIO: GIO[020]
UART2: Receive Data
B15
I/O/Z
VDD
MMCSD1
_DATA2 /
GIO021 /
UART2_C
TS
MMCSD1: DATA2
GIO: GIO[021]
UART2: CTS
A16
B16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
MMCSD1
_DATA3 /
GIO022 /
UART2_R
TS
MMCSD1: DATA3
GIO: GIO[022]
UART2: RTS
VDD
MMCSD1
_CMD /
GIO023
MMCSD1: Command
GIO: GIO[023]
A17
C15
F16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
MMCSD1
_CLK /
GIO024
MMCSD1: Clock
GIO: GIO[024]
ASP0_FS
R /
GIO025
ASP0: Receive Frame Synch
GIO: GIO[025]
ASP0_CL
KR /
GIO026
ASP0: Receive Clock
GIO: GIO[026]
F17
E18
G17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
ASP0_DR
/ GIO027
ASP0: Receive Data
GIO: GIO[027]
ASP0_FS
X /
GIO028
ASP0: Transmit Frame Synch
GIO: GIO[028]
ASP0_CL
KX /
GIO029
ASP0: Transmit Clock
GIO: GIO[029]
F18
I/O/Z
VDD
ASP0_DX
/ GIO030
ASP0: Transmit Data
GIO: GIO[030]
H15
E19
H16
G18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
EM_CLK /
GIO031
OneNAND: Clock signal for OneNAND flash interface GIO: GIO[031]
EM_ADV /
GIO032
PD
VDD
OneNAND: Address Valid Detect for OneNAND interface
GIO: GIO[032]
EM_WAIT
/ GIO033
PU
VDD
Async EMIF: Async WAIT NAND/SM/xD: RDY/_BSY input
GIO: GIO[033]
Async EMIF: Output Enable
NAND/SM/xD: RE (Read Enable) output
GIO: GIO[034]
EM_OE /
GIO034
F19
J15
G19
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
Async EMIF: Write Enable
NAND/SM/xD: WE (Write Enable) output
GIO: GIO[035]
EM_WE /
GIO035
Async EMIF: Second Chip Select., Can be programmed to be used for standard
asynchronous memories (example: flash), OneNand or NAND memory.
GIO: GIO[036]
EM_CE1 /
GIO036
Async EMIF: Lowest numbered Chip Select. Can be programmed to be used for
standard asynchronous memories (example: flash), OneNand or NAND memory.
Used for the default boot and ROM boot modes.
EM_CE0 /
GIO037
J16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
GIO: GIO[037]
EM_D00 /
GIO038
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[00]
GIO: GIO[038]
H18
VDD
24
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
EM_D01 /
GIO039
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[01]
GIO: GIO[039]
J17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
EM_D02 /
GIO040
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[02]
GIO: GIO[040]
H19
J18
L15
J19
K17
K19
L16
K18
L19
L17
L18
M15
M19
M18
EM_D03 /
GIO041
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[03]
GIO: GIO[041]
EM_D04 /
GIO042
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[04]
GIO: GIO[042]
EM_D05 /
GIO043
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[05]
GIO: GIO[043]
EM_D06 /
GIO044
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[06]
GIO: GIO[044]
EM_D07 /
GIO045
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[07]
GIO: GIO[045]
EM_D08 /
GIO046
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[08]
GIO: GIO[046]
EM_D09 /
GIO047
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[09]
GIO: GIO[047]
EM_D10 /
GIO048
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[10]
GIO: GIO[048]
EM_D11 /
GIO049
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[11]
GIO: GIO[049]
EM_D12 /
GIO050
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[12]
GIO: GIO[050]
EM_D13 /
GIO051
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[13]
GIO: GIO[051]
EM_D14 /
GIO052
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[14]
GIO: GIO[052]
EM_D15 /
GIO053
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[15]
GIO: GIO[053]
Async EMIF: Bank Address 0 signal = 8-bit address. In 8-bit mode, lowest
address bit. Or, can be used as an extra Address line (bit[14] when using 16-bit
memories.
GIO: GIO[054]
EM_BA0 /
GIO054 /
EM_A14
N19
I/O/Z
VDD
Async EMIF: Bank Address 1 signal = 16-bit address. In 16-bit mode, lowest
address bit. In 8-bit mode, second lowest address bit
GIO: GIO[055]
EM_BA1 /
GIO055
P19
M16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[00] Note that the EM_A0 is always a 32-bit
address
GIO: GIO[056]
EM_A00 /
GIO056
VDD
EM_A03 /
GIO057
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[03]
GIO: GIO[057]
N18
P15
R19
P18
P16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
EM_A04 /
GIO058
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[04]
GIO: GIO[058]
EM_A05 /
GIO059
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[05]
GIO: GIO[059]
EM_A06 /
GIO060
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[06]
GIO: GIO[060]
EM_A07 /
GIO061
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[07]
GIO: GIO[061] - Used by ROM Bootloader to provide progress status via LED
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[08]
EM_A08 /
GIO062 /
AECFG[0]
PU
VDD
GIO: GIO[062] AECFG[0] sets default for - PinMux2.EM_A0_BA1: AEMIF
Address Width (OneNAND or NAND) - PinMux2.EM_A13_3: AEMIF Address
Width (OneNAND or NAND)
T19
I/O/Z
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
25
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[09]
EM_A09 /
GIO063 /
AECFG[1]
PD
VDD
GIO: GIO[063] System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF
Configuration AECFG[2:1] sets default for PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0
Definition (EM_BA0, EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)
P17
I/O/Z
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[10]
EM_A10 /
GIO064 /
AECFG[2]
PU
VDD
GIO: GIO[064] System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF
Configuration AECFG[2:1] sets default for PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0
Definition (EM_BA0, EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)
R18
I/O/Z
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[11]
EM_A11 /
GIO065 /
AECFG[3]
PU
VDD
GIO: GIO[065] System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF
Configuration AECFG[3] sets default for PinMux2.EM_D15_8: AEMIF Default
Bus Width (16 or 8 bits)
R16
U19
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
EM_A12 /
GIO066 /
BTSEL[0]
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[12]
GIO: GIO[066] System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to determine
Boot method
PD
VDD
Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[13]
EM_A13 /
GIO067 /
BTSEL[1]
PD
VDD
GIO: GIO[067] System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at Power-on-Reset to determine
Boot method Used to drive Boot Status LED signal (active low) in ROM boot
modes
V19
H3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VCLK /
GIO068
Video Encoder: Video Output Clock
GIO: GIO[068]
VDD_VOUT
EXTCLK /
GIO069 /
B2 /
Video Encoder: External clock input, used if clock rates > 27 MHz are needed,
e.g. 74.25 MHz for HDTV digital output
GIO: GIO[069] Digital Video Out: B2 PWM3D
PD
VDD_VOUT
G3
PWM3D
FIELD /
GIO070 /
R2 /
Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced display formats
GIO: GIO[070] Digital Video Out: R2 PWM3C
H4
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PWM3C
VSYNC /
GIO072
PD
VDD_VOUT
Video Encoder: Vertical Sync
GIO: GIO[072]
G5
F5
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
HSYNC /
GIO073
PD
VDD_VOUT
Video Encoder: Horizontal Sync
GIO: GIO[073]
COUT0-
B3 /
GIO074 /
PWM3B
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[074]
PWM3B
F4
F3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
COUT1-
B4 /
GIO075 /
PWM3A
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[075]
PWM3A
VDD_VOUT
COUT2-
B5 /
GIO076 /
PWM2D /
RTO3
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076] PWM2D
RTO3
E4
E3
D3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
COUT3-
B6 /
GIO077 /
PWM2C /
RTO2
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077] PWM2C
RTO2
COUT4-
B7 /
GIO078 /
PWM2B /
RTO1
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078] PWM2B
RTO1
26
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
COUT5-
G2 /
GIO079 /
PWM2A /
RTO0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079] PWM2A
RTO0
C1
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
COUT6-
G3 /
GIO080 /
PWM1
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[080]
PWM1
D2
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
COUT7-
G4 /
GIO081 /
PWM0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[081]
PWM0
C2
T3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PCLK /
GIO082
PD
VDD_VIN
Pixel clock input (strobe for lines CI7 through YI0) GIO: GIO[082]
Write enable input signal is used by external device (AFE/TG) to gate the DDR
output of the CCDC module. Alternately, the field identification input signal is
used by external device (AFE/TG) to indicate the which of two frames is input to
the CCDC module for sensors with interlaced output. CCDC handles 1- or 2-field
sensors in hardware. GIO: GIO[083]
CAM_WE
N_FIELD /
GIO083
PD
VDD_VIN
R5
I/O/Z
Vertical synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an
output (master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new frame starts.
GIO: GIO[084]
CAM_VD /
GIO084
PD
VDD_VIN
R4
N5
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
Horizontal synchronization signal that can be either an input (slave mode) or an
output (master mode). Tells the CCDC when a new line starts.
GIO: GIO[085]
CAM_HD /
GIO085
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[00] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[00] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[00]
GIO: GIO[086]
YIN0 /
GIO086
PD
VDD_VIN
P5
P2
P4
R3
P3
M5
M4
L5
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[01] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[01] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[01]
GIO: GIO[087]
YIN1 /
GIO087
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[02] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[02] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[02]
GIO: GIO[088]
YIN2 /
GIO088
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[03] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[03] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[03]
GIO: GIO[089]
YIN3 /
GIO089
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[04] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[04] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[04]
GIO: GIO[090]
YIN4 /
GIO090
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[05] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[05] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[05]
GIO: GIO[091]
YIN5 /
GIO091
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[06] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[06] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[06]
GIO: GIO[092]
YIN6 /
GIO092
PD
VDD_VIN
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[07] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between luma:
Y[07] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder inputs), it is time
multiplexed between luma and chroma of the lower channel. Y/CB/CR[07]
GIO: GIO[093]
YIN7 /
GIO093
PD
VDD_VIN
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
27
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-11. GPIO Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[08] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[00] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[00]
CIN0 /
GIO094
PD
VDD_VIN
J3
I/O/Z
GIO: GIO[094]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[09] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[01] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[01]
CIN1 /
GIO095
PD
VDD_VIN
L3
J5
J4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
GIO: GIO[095]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[10] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[02] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[02]
CIN2 /
GIO096
PD
VDD_VIN
GIO: GIO[096]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[11] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[03] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[03]
CIN3 /
GIO097
PD
VDD_VIN
GIO: GIO[097]
CIN4 /
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[12] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[04] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[04] SPI: SPI2 Data In -OR- SPI2 Chip select 1.
GIO: GIO[098]
GIO098 /
SPI2_SDI
/
SPI2_SDE
NA[1]
PD
VDD_VIN
L4
I/O/Z
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[13] YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[05] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[05] SPI: SPI2 Chip Select 0.
CIN5 /
GIO099 /
SPI2_SDE
NA[0]
PD
VDD_VIN
M3
K5
N3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
GIO: GIO[99]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: NOT USED YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[06] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[06] SPI: SPI2 Data Out
CIN6 /
GIO100 /
SPI2_SD
O
PD
VDD_VIN
GIO: GIO[100]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: NOT USED YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between
chroma: CB/CR[07] YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2 simultaneous decoder
inputs), it is time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[07] SPI: SPI2 Clock
CIN7 /
GIO101 /
SPI2_SCL
K
PD
VDD_VIN
GIO: GIO[101]
SPI0_SDI
/ GIO102
SPI0: Data In
GIO: GIO[102]
A12
B12
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
SPI0_SDE
NA[0] /
GIO103
SPI0: Chip Select 0
GIO: GIO[103]
VDD
28
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
2.4.6 Multi-Media Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD) Interfaces
The DM355 includes two Multi-Media Card/Secure Digital card interfaces that are compatible with the
MMC/SD and SDIO protocol.
Table 2-12. MMC/SD Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
MMCSD0_
CLK
A15
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
MMCSD0: Clock
MMCSD0_
CMD
C14
B14
D14
B13
A14
MMCSD0: Command
MMCSD0: DATA0
MMCSD0: DATA1
MMCSD0: DATA2
MMCSD0: DATA3
MMCSD0_
DATA0
MMCSD0_
DATA1
MMCSD0_
DATA2
MMCSD0_
DATA3
MMCSD1_
CLK/
GIO024
MMCSD1: Clock
GIO: GIO[024]
C15
A17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
MMCSD1_
CMD/
GIO023
MMCSD1: Command
GIO: GIO[023]
VDD
MMCSD1_
DATA0/
GIO019/
UART2_T
XD
MMCSD1: DATA0
GIO: GIO[019]
UART2: Transmit data
A18
B15
A16
B16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
MMCSD1_
DATA1/
GIO020/
UART2_R
XD
MMCSD1: DATA1
GIO: GIO[020]
UART2: Receive data
MMCSD1_
DATA2/
GIO021/
UART2_C
TS
MMCSD1: DATA2
GIO: GIO[021]
UART2: CTS
MMCSD1_
DATA3/
GIO022/
UART2_R
TS
MMCSD1: DATA3
GIO: GIO[022]
UART2: RTS
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
29
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
2.4.7 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Interface
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface supports the USB2.0 High-Speed protocol and includes dual-role
Host/Slave support. However, no charge pump is included.
Table 2-13. USB Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
USB D+ (differential signal pair).
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
USB_DP
A7
A I/O/Z
A I/O/Z
VDDA33_USB
VDDA33_USB
.
.
USB D- (differential signal pair).
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
USB_DM
USB_R1
A6
C7
USB reference current output
Connect to VSS_USB_REF via 10K ohm , 1% resistor placed as close to the device
as possible.
A I/O/Z
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
.
USB operating mode identification pin
For Device mode operation only, pull up this pin to VDD with a 1.5K ohm resistor.
For Host mode operation only, pull down this pin to ground (VSS) with a 1.5K ohm
resistor.
If using an OTG or mini-USB connector, this pin will be set properly via the
cable/connector configuration.
USB_ID
D5
E5
A I/O/Z
VDDA33_USB
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
.
For host or device mode operation, tie the VBUS/USB power signal to the USB
connector.
When used in OTG mode operation, tie VBUS to the external charge pump and
to the VBUS signal on the USB connector.
USB_VBUS
A I/O/Z
VDD
When the USB is not used, tie VBUS to VSS_USB
.
Digital output to control external 5 V supply
When USB is not used, this signal should be left as a No Connect.
USB_DRVVBUS
VSS_USB_REF
C5
C8
O/Z
VDD
USB Ground Reference
Connect directly to ground and to USB_R1 via 10K ohm, 1% resistor placed as
close to the device as possible.
GND
VDD
Analog 3.3 V power USBPHY
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
VDDA33_USB
VDDA33_USB_PLL
VDDA13_USB
VDDD13_USB
J8
B6
H7
C6
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
.
.
.
.
Common mode 3.3 V power for USB PHY (PLL)
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
Analog 1.3 V power for USB PHY
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
Digital 1.3 V power for USB PHY
When USB is not used, this signal should be connected to VSS_USB
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3 , Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
2.4.8 Audio Interfaces
The DM355 includes two Audio Serial Ports (ASP ports), which are backward compatible with other TI
ASP serial ports and provide I2S audio interface. One interface is multiplexed with GIO signals.
Table 2-14. ASP Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
ASP0_CL
KR/
GIO026
ASP0: Receive Clock
GIO: GIO[026]
F17
I/O/Z
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
30
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-14. ASP Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
ASP0_CL
KX /
GIO029
ASP0: Transmit Clock
GIO: GIO[029]
F18
I/O/Z
VDD
ASP0_DR
/
GIO027
ASP0: Receive DataF
GIO: GIO[027]
E18
H15
F16
G17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
ASP0_DX
/
GIO030
ASP0: Transmit Data
GIO: GIO[030]
ASP0_FS
R /
GIO025
ASP0: Receive Frame Synch
GIO: GIO[025]
ASP0_FS
X /
ASP0: Transmit Frame SynchGIO: GIO[028]
GIO028
ASP1_CL
KR
D18
D17
D19
I/O/Z
I/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
ASP1: Receive Clock
ASP1: Master Clock
ASP1: Transmit Clock
ASP1_CL
KS
ASP1_CL
KX
I/O/Z
ASP1_DR
ASP1_DX
C19
C18
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
ASP1: Receive Data
ASP1: Transmit Data
ASP1_FS
R
E17
E16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
ASP1: Receive Frame Synch
ASP1: Transmit Frame Sync
ASP1_FS
X
2.4.9 UART Interface
The DM355 includes three UART ports. These ports are multiplexed with GIO and other signals.
Table 2-15. UART Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3) DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
U18
T18
UART0_RXD
UART0_TXD
I
VDD
VDD
UART0: Receive data. Used for UART boot mode
O
UART0: Transmit data. Used for UART boot mode
UART1_RXD/
GIO013
UART1: Receive data.
GIO: GIO013
R15
R17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
UART1_TXD/
GIO012
UART1: Transmit data.
GIO: GIO012
MMCSD1_DA
TA2/
GIO021/
MMCSD1: DATA2
GIO: GIO021
UART2: CTS
A16
B16
B15
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
UART2_CTS
MMCSD1_DA
TA3/
GIO022/
MMCSD1: DATA3
GIO: GIO022
UART2: RTS
UART2_RTS
MMCSD1_DA
TA1/
GIO020/
MMCSD1: DATA1
GIO: GIO020
UART2: RXD
UART2_RXD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
31
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-15. UART Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3) DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
MMCSD1_DA
TA0/
GIO019/
MMCSD1: DATA0
GIO: GIO019
UART2: TXD
A18
I/O/Z
VDD
UART2_TXD
2.4.10 I2C Interface
The DM355 includes an I2C two-wire serial interface for control of external peripherals. This interface is
multiplexed with GIO signals.
Table 2-16. I2C Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
I2C_SDA/
GIO015
I2C: Serial data
GIO: GIO015
R13
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
I2C_SCL/
GIO014
I2C: Serial clock
GIO: GIO014
R14
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
2.4.11 Serial Interface
The DM355 includes three independent serial ports. These interfaces are multiplexed with GIO and other
signals.
Table 2-17. SPI Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3) DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
SPI0_SCLK
C12
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
SPI0: Clock
SPI0_SDENA[0]/
GIO103
SPI0: Chip select 0
GIO: GIO[103]
B12
C17
GIO007
SPI0_SDENA[1]
GIO: GIO[007]
SPI0: Chip select 1
I/O/Z
VDD
SPI0_SDI/
GIO102
SPI0: Data in
GIO: GIO[102]
A12
B11
C13
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
SPI0_SDO
SPI0: Data out
SPI1_SCLK/
GIO010
SPI1: Clock
GIO: GIO[010]
SPI1: Chip select 0
GIO: GIO[011] - Active low during MMC/SD boot (can be used as
MMC/SD power control)
SPI1_SDENA[0]/
GIO011
E13
I/O/Z
VDD
SPI1_SDI/
GIO009/
SPI1_SDENA[1]
SPI1: Data in or
SPI1: Chip select 1
GIO: GIO[09]
A13
E12
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
SPI1_SDO/
GIO008
SPI1: Data out
GIO: GIO[008]
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
32
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-17. SPI Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3) DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Not used
•
•
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[07]
CIN7/
GIO101/
SPI2_SCLK
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[07]
PD
VDD_VIN
N3
I/O/Z
SPI: SPI2 clock
GIO: GIO[101]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[13]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[05]
CIN5/
GIO099/
SPI2_SDENA[0]
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[07]
PD
VDD_VIN
M3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
SPI: SPI2 chip select 0
GIO: GIO[099]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Raw[12]
•
•
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[04]
CIN4/
GIO098/
SPI2_SDI/
SPI2_SDENA[1]
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[04]
PD
VDD_VIN
L4
SPI: SPI2 Data in -OR- SPI2 Chip select 1
GIO: GIO[0998]
Standard CCD/CMOS input: Not used
•
•
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed between chroma. CB/CR[06]
CIN6/
GIO100/
SPI2_SDO/
YCC 8-bit (which allows for two simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[06]
PD
VDD_VIN
K5
SPI: SPI2 Data out
GIO: GIO[100]
2.4.12 Clock Interface
The DM355 provides interface with the system clocks.
Table 2-18. Clocks Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
CLKOUT1
/ GIO018
CLKOUT: Output Clock 1
GIO: GIO[018]
D12
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
CLKOUT2
/ GIO017
CLKOUT: Output Clock 2
GIO: GIO[017]
A11
CLKOUT3
/ GIO016
CLKOUT: Output Clock 3
GIO: GIO[016]
C11
A9
I/O/Z
VDD
VDD
VDD
MXI1
I
Crystal input for system oscillator (24 MHz or 36 MHz)
Output for system oscillator (24 MHz or 36 MHz). When the MX02 is not used,
the MX02 signal can be left open.
MXO1
B9
O
Crystal input for video oscillator (27 MHz) Optional, use only if 27MHz derived
from MXI1 and PLL does not provide sufficient performance for Video DAC.
When the MXI2 is not used and powered down, the MXI2 signal should be left
as a No Connect
MXI2
R1
T1
I
VDD
Output for video oscillator (27 MHz) Optional, use only if 27MHz derived from
MXI1 and PLL does not provide sufficient performance for Video DAC When the
MXO2 is not used and powered down, the MXO2 signal should be left as a No
Connect.
MXO2
O
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
33
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
2.4.13 Real Time Output (RTO) Interface
The DM355 provides Real Time Output (RTO) interface.
Table 2-19. RTO Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
COUT5-
G2 /
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079]
GIO079 /
PWM2A /
RTO0
C1
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PWM2A
RTO0
COUT4-
B7 /
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078]
GIO078 /
PWM2B /
RTO1
D3
E3
E4
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
PWM2B
RTO1
COUT3-
B6 /
GIO077 /
PWM2C /
RTO2
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077]
PWM2C
RTO2
COUT2-
B5 /
GIO076 /
PWM2D /
RTO3
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076]
PWM2D
RTO3
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
2.4.14 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Interface
The DM355 provides Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) interface.
Table 2-20. PWM Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
COUT7-
G4 /
GIO081 /
PWM0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[081]
PWM0
C2
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
COUT6-
G3 /
GIO080 /
PWM1
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[080]
PWM1
D2
C1
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
COUT5-
G2 /
GIO079 /
PWM2A /
RTO0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[079]
PWM2A
RTO0
VDD_VOUT
COUT4-
B7 /
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[078]
GIO078 /
PWM2B /
RTO1
D3
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PWM2B
RTO1
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
34
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-20. PWM Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
COUT3-
B6 /
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[077]
GIO077 /
PWM2C /
RTO2
E3
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PWM2C
RTO2
COUT2-
B5 /
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[076]
GIO076 /
PWM2D /
RTO3
E4
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
PWM2D
RTO3
COUT1-
B4 /
GIO075 /
PWM3A
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[075]
PWM3A
F3
F4
H4
G3
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
COUT0-
B3 /
GIO074 /
PWM3B
Digital Video Out: VENC settings determine function GIO: GIO[074]
PWM3B
FIELD /
GIO070 /
R2 /
Video Encoder: Field identifier for interlaced display formats GIO: GIO[070]
Digital Video Out: R2
PWM3C
PWM3C
EXTCLK /
GIO069 /
B2 /
Video Encoder: External clock input, used if clock rates > 27 MHz are needed,
e.g. 74.25 MHz for HDTV digital output GIO: GIO[069] Digital Video Out: B2
PWM3D
PD
VDD_VOUT
PWM3D
2.4.15 System Configuration Interface
The DM355 provides interfaces for system configuration and boot load.
Table 2-21. System/Boot Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Async EMIF: Address bus bit 13
GIO: GIO[067]
System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method. Used
to drive boot status LED signal (active low) in ROM boot modes.
EM_A13/
GIO067/
BTSEL[1]
PD
VDD
V19
I/O/Z
EM_A12/
GIO066/
BTSEL[0]
Async EMIF: Address bus bit 12
GIO: GIO[066]
System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at power-on-reset to determine boot method.
PD
VDD
U19
R16
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
Async EMIF: Address bus bit 11
GIO: GIO[065]
System: AECFG[3:0] sampled a power-on-reset to set AEMIF configuration.
AECFG[3] sets default fo PinMux2.EM_D15_8. AEMIF default bus width (16 or 8
bits).
EM_A11/
GIO065/
AECFG[3]
PU
VDD
Async EMIF: Address bus bit 10
EM_A10/
GIO064/
AECFG[2]
GIO: GIO[064]
PU
VDD
R18
P17
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
System: AECFG[3:0] sampled a power-on-reset to set AEMIF configuration.
AECFG[2:1] sets default fo PinMux2.EM_BA0. AEMIF EM_BA0 definition:
(EM,_BA0, EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)
Async EMIF: Address bus bit 09
GIO: GIO[063]
System: AECFG[3:0] sampled a power-on-reset to set AEMIF configuration.
AECFG[2:1] sets default fo PinMux2.EM_BA0. AEMIF EM_BA0 definition:
(EM,_BA0, EM_A14, GIO[054], rsvd)
EM_A09/
GIO063/
AECFG[1]
PD
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
35
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-21. System/Boot Terminal Functions (continued)
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
Async EMIF: Address bus bit 08
GIO: GIO[062]
System: AECFG[0] sets default for:
EM_A08/
GIO062/
AECFG[0]
PU
VDD
T19
I/O/Z
•
•
PinMux2.EM_A0_BA1 - AEMIF address width (OneNAND, or NAND)
PinMux2.EM_A13_3 - AEMIF address width (OneNAND, or NAND)
2.4.16 Emulation
The emulation interface allow software and hardware debugging.
Table 2-22. Emulation Terminal Functions
TERMINAL
TYPE(1)
OTHER(2)(3)
DESCRIPTION
NAME
NO.
TCK
E10
I
I
VDD
JTAG test clock input
JTAG test data input
JTAG test data output
JTAG test mode select
PU
VDD
TDI
D9
E9
D8
TDO
TMS
O
I
VDD
PU
VDD
PD
VDD
TRST
RTCK
C9
I
JTAG test logic reset (active low)
JTAG test clock output
E11
O
VDD
JTAG emulation 0 I/O
EMU[1:0] = 00 - Force Debug Scan chain (ARM and ARM ETB TAPs connected)
EMU[1:0] = 11 - Normal Scan chain (ICEpick only)
PU
VDD
EMU0
EMU1
E8
E7
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
JTAG emulation 1 I/O
EMU[1:0] = 00 - Force Debug Scan chain (ARM and ARM ETB TAPs connected)
EMU[1:0] = 11 - Normal Scan chain (ICEpick only)
PU
VDD
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
36
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
2.5 Pin List
Table 2-23 provides a complete pin description list in pin number order.
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
CIN7 / GIO101 /
SPI2_SCLK
N3
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO /
SPI2
VDD_VIN
PD
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: NOT
USED
PINMUX0[1:0].CIN_7
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[07]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between
luma and chroma of the upper
channel. Y/CB/CR[07]
SPI: SPI2 Clock
GIO: GIO[101]
CIN6 / GIO100 /
SPI2_SDO
K5
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO /
SPI2
VDD_VIN
PD
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: NOT
USED
PINMUX0[3:2].CIN_6
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[06]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[06]
SPI: SPI2 Data Out
GIO: GIO[100]
CIN5 / GIO099 /
SPI2_SDENA[0]
M3
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO /
SPI2
VDD_VIN
PD
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[13] PINMUX0[5:4].CIN_5
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[05]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[05]
SPI: SPI2 Chip Select 0
GIO: GIO[99]
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground, A = Analog signal.
(2) Specifies the operating I/O supply voltage for each signal. See Section 5.3, Power Supplies for more detail.
(3) PD = pull-down, PU = pull-up. (To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor should be used.)
(4) To reduce EMI and reflections, depending on the trace length, approximately 22 Ω to 50 Ω damping resistors are recommend on the
following outputs placed near the DM355: YOUT(0-7),COUT(0-7), HSYNC,VSYNC,LCD_OE,FIELD,EXTCLK,VCLK. The trace lengths
should be minimized.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
37
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
CIN4 / GIO098 /
SPI2_SDI /
SPI2_SDENA[1]
L4
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO /
SPI2 /
SPI2
VDD_VIN
PD
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[12] PINMUX0[7:6].CIN_4
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[04]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[04]
SPI: SPI2 Data In -OR- SPI2 Chip
select 1
GIO: GIO[098]
CIN3 / GIO097
CIN2 / GIO096
CIN1 / GIO095
CIN0 / GIO094
J4
J5
L3
J3
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
PD
PD
PD
PD
in
in
in
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[11] PINMUX0[8].CIN_32
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[03]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[03]
GIO: GIO[097]
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[10] PINMUX0[8].CIN_32
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[02]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[02]
GIO: GIO[096]
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[09] PINMUX0[9].CIN_10
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[01]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[01]
GIO: GIO[095]
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[08] PINMUX0[9].CIN_10
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between chroma: CB/CR[00]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the upper channel.
Y/CB/CR[00]
GIO: GIO[094]
38
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
YIN7 / GIO093
L5
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
PD
PD
PD
PD
PD
in
in
in
in
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[07] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[07]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[07]
GIO: GIO[093]
YIN6 / GIO092
YIN5 / GIO091
YIN4 / GIO090
YIN3 / GIO089
M4
M5
P3
R3
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[06] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[06]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[06]
GIO: GIO[092]
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[05] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[05]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[05]
GIO: GIO[091]
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[04] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[04]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[04]
GIO: GIO[090]
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[03] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[03]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[03]
GIO: GIO[089]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
39
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
YIN2 / GIO088
P4
I/O
I/O
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
PD
PD
PD
in
in
in
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[02] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[02]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[02]
GIO: GIO[088]
YIN1 / GIO087
P2
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[01] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[01]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[01]
GIO: GIO[087]
YIN0 / GIO086
P5
CCDC
/ GIO
Standard CCD/CMOS input: raw[00] PINMUX0[10].YIN_70
YCC 16-bit: time multiplexed
between luma: Y[00]
YCC 08-bit (which allows for 2
simultaneous decoder inputs), it is
time multiplexed between luma and
chroma of the lower channel.
Y/CB/CR[00]
GIO: GIO[086]
CAM_HD /
GIO085
N5
R4
R5
I/O
I/O
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
VDD_VIN
PD
PD
PD
in
in
in
Horizontal synchronization signal that PINMUX0[11].CAM_HD
can be either an input (slave mode)
or an output (master mode). Tells the
CCDC when a new line starts.
GIO: GIO[085]
CAM_VD /
GIO084
CCDC
/ GIO
Vertical synchronization signal that
can be either an input (slave mode)
or an output (master mode). Tells the
CCDC when a new frame starts.
PINMUX0[12].CAM_VD
GIO: GIO[084]
CAM_WEN_FIE
LD / GIO083
CCDC
/ GIO
Write enable input signal is used by
external device (AFE/TG) to gate the
DDR output of the CCDC module.
PINMUX0[13].CAM_WEN
plus
Alternately, the field identification
input signal is used by external
device (AFE/TG) to indicate the
which of two frames is input to the
CCDC module for sensors with
interlaced output. CCDC handles 1-
or 2-field sensors in hardware.
GIO: GIO[083]
CCDC.MODE[7].CCDMD &
CCDC.MODE[5].SWEN
PCLK / GIO082
T3
I/O
CCDC
/ GIO
VDD_VIN
PD
in
Pixel clock input (strobe for lines CI7 PINMUX0[14].PCLK
through YI0)
GIO: GIO[082]
40
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
C3
A4
B4
B3
B2
A3
A2
B1
C2
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
YOUT7-R7
YOUT6-R6
YOUT5-R5
YOUT4-R4
YOUT3-R3
YOUT2-G7
YOUT1-G6
YOUT0-G5
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
VENC
VENC
VENC
VENC
VENC
VENC
VENC
VENC
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function(4)
COUT7-G4 /
GIO081 /
PWM0
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
0
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
PINMUX1[1:0].COUT_7
PINMUX1[3:2].COUT_6
PINMUX1[5:4].COUT_5
GIO: GIO[081]
PWM0
COUT6-G3 /
GIO080 /
PWM1
D2
C1
I/O
I/O
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
1
VDD_VOUT
in
in
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
GIO: GIO[080]
PWM1(4)
COUT5-G2 /
GIO079 /
PWM2A / RTO0
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
2 /
VDD_VOUT
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
RTO
GIO: GIO[079]
PWM2A
RTO0(4)
COUT4-B7 /
GIO078 /
PWM2B / RTO1
D3
I/O
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
2 /
VDD_VOUT
in
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
PINMUX1[7:6].COUT_4
RTO
GIO: GIO[078]
PWM2B
RTO1(4)
COUT3-B6 /
GIO077 /
PWM2C / RTO2
E3
I/O
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
2 /
VDD_VOUT
in
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
PINMUX1[9:8].COUT_3
RTO
GIO: GIO[077]
PWM2C
RTO2(4)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
41
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
COUT2-B5 /
GIO076 /
PWM2D / RTO3
E4
I/O
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
2 /
VDD_VOUT
in
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
PINMUX1[11:10].COUT_2
RTO
GIO: GIO[076]
PWM2D
RTO3(4)
COUT1-B4 /
GIO075 /
PWM3A
F3
F4
I/O
I/O
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
3
VDD_VOUT
in
in
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
PINMUX1[13:12].COUT_1
PINMUX1[15:14].COUT_0
GIO: GIO[075]
PWM3A(4)
COUT0-B3 /
GIO074 /
PWM3B
VENC
/ GIO /
PWM
3
VDD_VOUT
Digital Video Out: VENC settings
determine function
GIO: GIO[074]
PWM3B(4)
HSYNC /
GIO073
F5
G5
H5
H4
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
VENC
/ GIO
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
PD
PD
in
in
in
in
Video Encoder: Horizontal Sync
PINMUX1[16].HVSYNC
PINMUX1[16].HVSYNC
PINMUX1[17].DLCD
GIO: GIO[073](4)
VSYNC /
GIO072
VENC
/ GIO
Video Encoder: Vertical Sync
GIO: GIO[072](4)
LCD_OE /
GIO071
VENC
/ GIO
Video Encoder: LCD Output Enable
or BRIGHT signal
GIO: GIO[071](4)
FIELD / GIO070
/ R2 / PWM3C
VENC
/ GIO /
VENC
/
Video Encoder: Field identifier for
interlaced display formats
PINMUX1[19:18].FIELD
PWM
3
GIO: GIO[070]
Digital Video Out: R2
PWM3C(4)
EXTCLK /
GIO069 / B2 /
PWM3D
G3
I/O
VENC
/ GIO /
VENC
/
VDD_VOUT
PD
in
Video Encoder: External clock input, PINMUX1[21:20].EXTCLK
used if clock rates > 27 MHz are
needed, e.g. 74.25 MHz for HDTV
digital output
PWM
3
GIO: GIO[069]
Digital Video Out: B2
PWM3D(4)
VCLK / GIO068
H3
I/O
VENC
/ GIO
VDD_VOUT
out L Video Encoder: Video Output Clock
PINMUX1[22].VCLK
GIO: GIO[068](4)
VREF
IOUT
J7
A I/O Video
DAC
Video DAC: Reference voltage
output (0.45V, 0.1uF to GND)
E1
A I/O Video
DAC
Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC
output (1000 ohm to VFB)
42
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
IBIAS
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
F2
A I/O Video
DAC
Video DAC: External resistor (2550
Ohms to GND) connection for current
bias configuration
VFB
G1
F1
A I/O Video
DAC
Video DAC: Pre video buffer DAC
output (1000 ohm to IOUT, 1070
ohm to TVOUT)
TVOUT
A I/O Video VDDA18_DAC
DAC
Video DAC: Analog Composite
NTSC/PAL output (SeeFigure 5-31
andFigure 5-32 for circuit connection)
VDDA18V_DAC
VSSA_DAC
L7
L8
PWR Video
DAC
Video DAC: Analog 1.8V power
GND Video
DAC
Video DAC: Analog 1.8V ground
DDR_CLK
DDR_CLK
DDR_RAS
DDR_CAS
DDR_WE
W9
W8
T6
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
out L DDR Data Clock
out H DDR Complementary Data Clock
out H DDR Row Address Strobe
out H DDR Column Address Strobe
out H DDR Write Enable (active low)
out H DDR Chip Select (active low)
out L DDR Clock Enable
V9
W10
T8
DDR_CS
DDR_CKE
DDR_DQM[1]
V10
U15
out L Data mask outputs: DDR_DQM1: For
DDR_DQ[15:8]
DDR_DQM[0]
DDR_DQS[1]
T12
V15
I/O
I/O
DDR
DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
out L Data mask outputs: DDR_DQM0: For
DDR_DQ[7:0]
in
Data strobe input/outputs for each
byte of the 16 bit data bus used to
synchronize the data transfers.
Output to DDR when writing and
inputs when reading.
DDR_DQS1: For DDR_DQ[15:8]
DDR_DQS[0]
V12
I/O
DDR
VDD_DDR
in
Data strobe input/outputs for each
byte of the 16 bit data bus used to
synchronize the data transfers.
Output to DDR when writing and
inputs when reading.
DDR_DQS0: For DDR_DQ[7:0]
DDR_BA[2]
DDR_BA[1]
DDR_BA[0]
V8
U7
U8
I/O
I/O
I/O
DDR
DDR
DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
out L Bank select outputs. Two are
required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.
out L Bank select outputs. Two are
required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.
out L Bank select outputs. Two are
required for 1Gb DDR2 memories.
DDR_A13
DDR_A12
DDR_A11
DDR_A10
DDR_A09
DDR_A08
DDR_A07
DDR_A06
DDR_A05
DDR_A04
U6
V7
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
out L DDR Address Bus bit 13
out L DDR Address Bus bit 12
out L DDR Address Bus bit 11
out L DDR Address Bus bit 10
out L DDR Address Bus bit 09
out L DDR Address Bus bit 08
out L DDR Address Bus bit 07
out L DDR Address Bus bit 06
out L DDR Address Bus bit 05
out L DDR Address Bus bit 04
W7
V6
W6
W5
V5
U5
W4
V4
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
43
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
DDR_A03
W3
W2
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
out L DDR Address Bus bit 03
out L DDR Address Bus bit 02
out L DDR Address Bus bit 01
out L DDR Address Bus bit 00
DDR_A02
DDR_A01
V3
DDR_A00
V2
DDR_DQ15
DDR_DQ14
DDR_DQ13
DDR_DQ12
DDR_DQ11
DDR_DQ10
DDR_DQ09
DDR_DQ08
DDR_DQ07
DDR_DQ06
DDR_DQ05
DDR_DQ04
DDR_DQ03
DDR_DQ02
DDR_DQ01
DDR_DQ00
W17
V16
W16
U16
W15
W14
V14
U13
W13
V13
W12
U12
T11
U11
W11
V11
W18
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
DDR Data Bus bit 15
DDR Data Bus bit 14
DDR Data Bus bit 13
DDR Data Bus bit 12
DDR Data Bus bit 11
DDR Data Bus bit 10
DDR Data Bus bit 09
DDR Data Bus bit 08
DDR Data Bus bit 07
DDR Data Bus bit 06
DDR Data Bus bit 05
DDR Data Bus bit 04
DDR Data Bus bit 03
DDR Data Bus bit 02
DDR Data Bus bit 01
DDR Data Bus bit 00
DDR_
DQGATE0
DDR: Loopback signal for external
DQS gating. Route to DDR and back
to DDR_DQGATE1 with same
constraints as used for DDR clock
and data.
DDR_
DQGATE1
V17
I/O
DDR
VDD_DDR
DDR: Loopback signal for external
DQS gating. Route to DDR and back
to DDR_DQGATE0 with same
constraints as used for DDR clock
and data.
DDR_VREF
VSSA_DLL
U10
R11
R10
T9
PWR DDRI
O
VDD_DDR
VSSA_DLL
DDR: Voltage input for the SSTL_18
IO buffers
GND DDRD
LL
DDR: Ground for the DDR DLL
VDDA33_DDRDLL
DDR_ZN
PWR DDRD VDDA33_DDR
DDR: Power (3.3 Volts) for the DDR
DLL
LL
DLL
I/O
I/O
DDRI
O
VDD_DDR
DDR: Reference output for drive
strength calibration of N and P
channel outputs. Tie to ground via 50
ohm resistor @ 0.5% tolerance.
EM_A13 /
GIO067 /
BTSEL[1]
V19
AEMI
F /
VDD
PD
in L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[13]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
default set by AECFG[0]
GIO /
syste
m
GIO: GIO[067]
System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at
Power-on-Reset to determine Boot
method (00:NAND, 01:Flash,
10:MMC/SD, 11:UART )
44
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
EM_A12 /
GIO066 /
BTSEL[0]
U19
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO /
syste
m
VDD
PD
in L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[12]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
GIO: GIO[066]
default set by AECFG[0]
System: BTSEL[1:0] sampled at
Power-on-Reset to determine Boot
method (00:NAND, 01:Flash,
10:MMC/SD, 11:UART)
EM_A11 /
GIO065 /
AECFG[3]
R16
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO /
syste
m
VDD
PU
in H Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[11]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
default set by AECFG[0]
GIO: GIO[065]
System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at
Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF
Configuration
AECFG[3] sets default for
PinMux2.EM_D15_8: AEMIF Default
Bus Width (0:16 or 1:8 bits)
EM_A10 /
GIO064 /
AECFG[2]
R18
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO /
syste
m
VDD
PU
in H Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[10]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
default set by AECFG[0]
GIO: GIO[064]
System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at
Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF
Configuration
AECFG[2:1] sets default for
PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0
Definition (00: EM_BA0, 01:
EM_A14, 10:GIO[054], 11:rsvd)
EM_A09 /
GIO063 /
AECFG[1]
P17
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO /
syste
m
VDD
PD
in L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[09]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
default set by AECFG[0]
GIO: GIO[063]
System: AECFG[3:0] sampled at
Power-on-Reset to set AEMIF
Configuration
AECFG[2:1] sets default for
PinMux2.EM_BA0: AEMIF EM_BA0
Definition (00: EM_BA0, 01:
EM_A14, 10:GIO[054], 11:rsvd)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
45
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
EM_A08 /
GIO062 /
AECFG[0]
T19
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO /
syste
m
VDD
PU
in H Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[08]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
default set by AECFG[0]
GIO: GIO[062]
AECFG[0] sets default for
- PinMux2.EM_A0_BA1: AEMIF
Address Width (OneNAND or NAND)
- PinMux2.EM_A13_3: AEMIF
Address Width (OneNAND or NAND)
(0:AEMIF address bits, 1:GIO[67:57])
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[07]
EM_A07 /
GIO061
P16
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
default set by AECFG[0]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
GIO: GIO[061] - Used by ROM
Bootloader to provide progress status
via LED (active low)
EM_A06 /
GIO060
P18
R19
P15
N18
N15
N17
M16
P19
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[06]
GIO: GIO[060]
default set by AECFG[0]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
EM_A05 /
GIO059
AEMI
F /
GIO
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[05]
GIO: GIO[059]
default set by AECFG[0]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
EM_A04 /
GIO058
AEMI
F /
GIO
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[04]
GIO: GIO[058]
default set by AECFG[0]
PINMUX2[0].EM_A13_3,
EM_A03 /
GIO057
AEMI
F /
GIO
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[03]
GIO: GIO[057]
default set by AECFG[0]
EM_A02
EM_A01
AEMI
F
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[02]
NAND/SM/xD: CLE - Command
Latch Enable output
AEMI
F
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[01]
NAND/SM/xD: ALE - Address Latch
Enable output
EM_A00 /
GIO056
AEMI
F /
GIO
out L Async EMIF: Address Bus bit[00]
Note that the EM_A0 is always a
32-bit address
PINMUX2[1].EM_A0_BA1,
default set by AECFG[0]
GIO: GIO[056]
EM_BA1 /
GIO055
AEMI
F /
out H Async EMIF: Bank Address 1 signal PINMUX2[1].EM_A0_BA1,
= 16-bit address.
GIO
In 16-bit mode, lowest address bit.
default set by AECFG[0]
In 8-bit mode, second lowest address
bit
GIO: GIO[055]
46
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
EM_BA0 /
GIO054 /
EM_A14
N19
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
out H Async EMIF: Bank Address 0 signal PINMUX2[3:2].EM_BA0,
= 8-bit address.
In 8-bit mode, lowest address bit.
default set by AECFG[2:1]
Or, can be used as an extra Address
line (bit[14] when using 16-bit
memories.
GIO: GIO[054]
EM_D15 /
GIO053
M18
M19
M15
L18
L17
L19
K18
L16
K19
K17
J19
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[15]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
GIO: GIO[053]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D14 /
GIO052
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[14]
GIO: GIO[052]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D13 /
GIO051
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[13]
GIO: GIO[051]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D12 /
GIO050
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[12]
GIO: GIO[050]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D11 /
GIO049
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[11]
GIO: GIO[049]
default set by AECFG[3]
PIN MUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D10 /
GIO048
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[10]
GIO: GIO[048]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D09 /
GIO047
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[09]
GIO: GIO[047]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[4].EM_D15_8,
EM_D08 /
GIO046
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[08]
GIO: GIO[046]
default set by AECFG[3]
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
EM_D07 /
GIO045
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[07]
GIO: GIO[045]
EM_D06 /
GIO044
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[06]
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
GIO: GIO[044]
EM_D05 /
GIO043
AEMI
F /
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[05]
GIO
GIO: GIO[043]
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
47
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
EM_D04 /
GIO042
L15
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
in
in
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[04]
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
PINMUX2[5].EM_D7_0
GIO: GIO[042]
EM_D03 /
GIO041
J18
H19
J17
H18
J16
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[03]
GIO: GIO[041]
EM_D02 /
GIO040
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[02]
GIO: GIO[040]
EM_D01 /
GIO039
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[01]
GIO: GIO[039]
EM_D00 /
GIO038
AEMI
F /
GIO
Async EMIF: Data Bus bit[00]
GIO: GIO[038]
EM_CE0 /
GIO037
AEMI
F /
out H Async EMIF: Lowest numbered Chip PINMUX2[6].EM_CE0
Select. Can be programmed to be
GIO
used for standard asynchronous
memories (example:flash), OneNand
or NAND memory. Used for the
default boot and ROM boot modes.
GIO: GIO[037]
EM_CE1 /
GIO036
G19
J15
I/O
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
out H Async EMIF: Second Chip Select.,
Can be programmed to be used for
standard asynchronous memories
(example: flash), OneNand or NAND
memory.
PINMUX2[7].EM_CE1
GIO: GIO[036]
EM_WE /
GIO035
AEMI
F /
VDD
out H Async EMIF: Write Enable
PINMUX2[8].EM_WE_OE
GIO
NAND/SM/xD: WE (Write Enable)
output
GIO: GIO[035]
EM_OE /
GIO034
F19
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
out H Async EMIF: Output Enable
PINMUX2[8].EM_WE_OE
PINMUX2[9].EM_WAIT
NAND/SM/xD: RE (Read Enable)
output
GIO: GIO[034]
EM_WAIT /
GIO033
G18
H16
I/O
I/O
AEMI
F /
GIO
VDD
PU
PD
in H Async EMIF: Async WAIT
NAND/SM/xD: RDY/_BSY input
GIO: GIO[033]
EM_ADV /
GIO032
AEMI
F /
VDD
in L OneNAND: Address Valid Detect for PINMUX2[10].EM_ADV
OneNAND interface
GIO
GIO: GIO[032]
48
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
EM_CLK /
GIO031
E19
I/O
AEMI
F /
VDD
out L OneNAND: Clock signal for
OneNAND flash interface
PINMUX2[11].EM_CLK
GIO
GIO: GIO[031]
ASP0_DX /
GIO030
H15
F18
G17
E18
F17
F16
C15
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
ASP0
/ GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
ASP0: Transmit Data
PINMUX3[0].GIO30
PINMUX3[1].GIO29
PINMUX3[2].GIO28
PINMUX3[3].GIO27
PINMUX3[4].GIO26
PINMUX3[5].GIO25
PINMUX3[6].GIO24
GIO: GIO[030]
ASP0_CLKX /
GIO029
ASP0
/ GIO
ASP0: Transmit Clock
GIO: GIO[029]
ASP0_FSX /
GIO028
ASP0
/ GIO
ASP0: Transmit Frame Synch
GIO: GIO[028]
ASP0_DR /
GIO027
ASP0
/ GIO
ASP0: Receive Data
GIO: GIO[027]
ASP0_CLKR /
GIO026
ASP0
/ GIO
ASP0: Receive Clock
GIO: GIO[026]
ASP0_FSR /
GIO025
ASP0
/ GIO
ASP0: Receive Frame Synch
GIO: GIO[025]
MMCSD1_CLK
/ GIO024
MMC
SD /
GIO
MMCSD1: Clock
GIO: GIO[024]
MMCSD1_CMD
/ GIO023
A17
B16
I/O
I/O
MMC
SD /
GIO
VDD
in
in
MMCSD1: Command
PINMUX3[7].GIO23
PINMUX3[9:8].GIO22
GIO: GIO[023]
MMCSD1_DAT
A3 / GIO022 /
UART2_RTS
MMC
SD /
GIO /
UART
2
VDD
MMCSD1: DATA3
GIO: GIO[022]
UART2: RTS
MMCSD1_DAT
A2 / GIO021 /
UART2_CTS
A16
B15
I/O
I/O
MMC
SD /
GIO /
UART
2
VDD
in
in
MMCSD1: DATA2
PINMUX3[11:10].GIO21
PINMUX3[13:12].GIO20
GIO: GIO[021]
UART2: CTS
MMCSD1_DAT
A1 / GIO020 /
UART2_RXD
MMC
SD /
GIO /
UART
2
VDD
MMCSD1: DATA1
GIO: GIO[020]
UART2: Receive Data
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
49
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
MMCSD1_DAT
A0 / GIO019 /
UART2_TXD
A18
I/O
MMC
SD /
GIO /
UART
2
VDD
in
MMCSD1: DATA0
PINMUX3[15:14].GIO19
GIO: GIO[019]
UART2: Transmit Data
CLKOUT: Output Clock 1
CLKOUT1 /
GIO018
D12
A11
C11
I/O
I/O
I/O
Clock
s /
GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
PINMUX3[16].GIO18
PINMUX3[17].GIO17
PINMUX3[18].GIO16
GIO: GIO[018]
CLKOUT2 /
GIO017
Clock
s /
GIO
CLKOUT: Output Clock 2
GIO: GIO[017]
CLKOUT3 /
GIO016
Clock
s /
CLKOUT: Output Clock 3
GIO
GIO: GIO[016]
I2C: Serial Data
I2C_SDA /
GIO015
R13
R14
R15
I/O
I/O
I/O
I2C /
GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
PINMUX3[19].GIO15
PINMUX3[20].GIO14
PINMUX3[21].GIO13
GIO: GIO[015]
I2C_SCL /
GIO014
I2C /
GIO
I2C: Serial Clock
GIO: GIO[014]
UART1_RXD /
GIO013
UART
1 /
UART1: Receive Data
GIO
GIO: GIO[013]
UART1_TXD /
GIO012
R17
I/O
UART
1 /
VDD
in
UART1: Transmit Data
PINMUX3[22].GIO12
GIO
GIO: GIO[012]
SPI1_SDENA[0] E13
/ GIO011
I/O
I/O
I/O
SPI1 /
GIO
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
SPI1: Chip Select 0
PINMUX3[23].GIO11
PINMUX3[24].GIO10
GIO: GIO[011]
SPI1: Clock
SPI1_SCLK /
GIO010
C13
A13
SPI1 /
GIO
GIO: GIO[010]
SPI1_SDI /
GIO009 /
SPI1 /
GIO /
SPI1
SPI1: Data In -OR- SPI1: Chip Select PINMUX3[26:25].GIO9
1
SPI1_SDENA[1]
GIO: GIO[009]
SPI1_SDO /
GIO008
E12
C17
I/O
I/O
SPI1 /
GIO
VDD
in
in
SPI1: Data Out
PINMUX3[27].GIO8
PINMUX3[28].GIO7
GIO: GIO[008]
GIO: GIO[007]
GIO007 /
GIO
VDD
SPI0_SDENA[1]
debou
nce /
SPI0
SPI0: Chip Select 1
GIO: GIO[006]
GIO006
B18
I/O
GIO
VDD
in
debou
nce
50
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
GIO005
GIO004
GIO003
GIO002
GIO001
GIO000
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
D15
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
GIO
debou
nce
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
in
in
in
GIO: GIO[005]
B17
G15
F15
E14
C16
GIO
debou
nce
GIO: GIO[004]
GIO: GIO[003]
GIO: GIO[002]
GIO: GIO[001]
GIO: GIO[000]
GIO
debou
nce
GIO
debou
nce
GIO
debou
nce
GIO
debou
nce
USB_DP
USB_DM
USB_R1
A7
A6
C7
A I/O USBP VDDA33_USB
HY
USB D+ (differential signal pair)
USB D- (differential signal pair)
USB Reference current output
A I/O USBP VDDA33_USB
HY
A I/O USBP
HY
Connect to VSS_USB_REF via 10K Ω
±1% resistor placed as close to the
device as possible.
USB_ID
D5
A I/O USBP VDDA33_USB
HY
USB operating mode identification
pin
For Device mode operation only, pull
up this pin to VDD with a 1.5K ohm
resistor.
For Host mode operation only, pull
down this pin to ground (VSS) with a
1.5K ohm resistor.
If using an OTG or mini-USB
connector, this pin will be set
properly via the cable/connector
configuration.
USB_VBUS
E5
A I/O USBP
HY
For host or device mode operation,
tie the VBUS/USB power signal to
the USB connector.
When used in OTG mode operation,
tie VBUS to the external charge
pump and to the VBUS signal on the
USB connector.
When the USB is not used, tie VBUS
to VSS_USB
.
USB_DRVVBU
S
C5
C8
O
USBP
HY
VDD
VDD
Digital output to control external 5 V
supply
VSS_USB_REF
GND USBP
HY
USB Ground Reference
Connect directly to ground and to
USB_R1
via 10K Ω ±1% resistor placed as
close to the device as possible.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
51
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
VDDA33_USB
VSS_USB
VDDA33_USB_PLL
VSS_USB
VDDA13_USB
VSS_USB
J8
PWR USBP
HY
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
Analog 3.3 V power USB PHY
(Transceiver)
B7
GND USBP
HY
Analog 3.3 V ground for USB PHY
(Transceiver)
B6
PWR USBP
HY
Common mode 3.3 V power for USB
PHY (PLL)
D6
GND USBP
HY
Common mode 3.3 V ground for
USB PHY (PLL)
H7
PWR USBP
HY
Analog 1.3 V power for USB PHY
Analog 1.3 V ground for USB PHY
Digital 1.3 V power for USB PHY
E6
GND USBP
HY
VDDD13_USB
MMCSD0_CLK
MMCSD0_CMD
C6
PWR USBP
HY
A15
C14
A14
B13
D14
B14
U18
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
MMC
SD0
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
out L MMCSD0: Clock
PINMUX4[2].MMCSD0_MS
PINMUX4[2].MMCSD0_MS
PINMUX4[2].MMCSD0_MS
PINMUX4[2].MMCSD0_MS
PINMUX4[2].MMCSD0_MS
PINMUX4[2].MMCSD0_MS
MMC
SD0
in
in
in
in
in
in
MMCSD0: Command
MMCSD0: DATA3
MMCSD0_DAT
A3
MMC
SD0
MMCSD0_DAT
A2
MMC
SD0
MMCSD0: DATA2
MMCSD0_DAT
A1
MMC
SD0
MMCSD0: DATA1
MMCSD0_DAT
A0
MMC
SD0
MMCSD0: DATA0
UART0_RXD
UART0_TXD
UART
0
UART0: Receive Data
Used for UART boot mode
T18
O
UART
0
VDD
out H UART0: Transmit Data
Used for UART boot mode
SPI0_SDENA[0] B12
/ GIO103
I/O
SPI0 /
GIO
VDD
in
SPI0: Enable / Chip Select 0
PINMUX4[0].SPI0_SDENA
PINMUX4[1].SPI0_SDI
GIO: GIO[103]
SPI0: Clock
SPI0_SCLK
C12
A12
I/O
I/O
SPI0
VDD
VDD
in
in
SPI0_SDI /
GIO102
SPI0 /
GIO
SPI0: Data In
GIO: GIO[102]
SPI0_SDO
ASP1_DX
ASP1_CLKX
ASP1_FSX
ASP1_DR
ASP1_CLKR
ASP1_FSR
ASP1_CLKS
RESET
B11
C18
D19
E16
C19
D18
E17
D17
D11
A9
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
SPI0
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
in
SPI0: Data Out
ASP1
ASP1
ASP1
ASP1
ASP1
ASP1
ASP1
ASP1: Transmit Data
ASP1: Transmit Clock
ASP1: Transmit Frame Sync
ASP1: Receive Data
ASP1: Receive Clock
ASP1: Receive Frame Synch
ASP1: Master Clock
I
PU
Global Chip Reset (active low)
MXI1
I
Clock
s
Crystal input for system oscillator (24
MHz)
MXO1
B9
O
Clock
s
VDD
out
Output for system oscillator (24 MHz)
52
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
MXI2
R1
I
Clock
s
VDD
in
Crystal input for video oscillator (27
MHz). This crystal is not required
VDD
MXO2
T1
O
Clock
s
VDD
out
Output for video oscillator (27 MHz).
This crystal is not required.
VDD
TCK
E10
D9
E9
I
I
EMUL
ATIO
N
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
PU
PU
in
in
JTAG test clock input
TDI
EMUL
ATIO
N
JTAG test data input
TDO
TMS
TRST
RTCK
EMU0
O
I
EMUL
ATIO
N
out L JTAG test data output
D8
C9
E11
E8
EMUL
ATIO
N
PU
PD
in
in
JTAG test mode select
I
EMUL
ATIO
N
JTAG test logic reset (active low)
O
I/O
EMUL
ATIO
N
out L JTAG test clock output
EMUL
ATIO
N
PU
PU
in
in
JTAG emulation 0 I/O
VDD
VDD
EMU1
E7
I/O
EMUL
ATIO
N
VDD
JTAG emulation 1 I/O
EMU[1:0] = 00 - Force Debug Scan
chain (ARM and ARM ETB TAPs
connected)
EMU[1:0] = 11 - Normal Scan chain
(ICEpick only)
RSV01
RSV02
RSV03
RSV04
J1
K1
L1
A
I/O/Z
Reserved. This signal should be left
as a No Connect or connected to
VSS
.
A
I/O/Z
Reserved. This signal should be left
as a No Connect or connected to
VSS
.
A
I/O/Z
Reserved. This signal should be left
as a No Connect or connected to
VSS
.
M1
A
I/O/Z
Reserved. This signal should be left
as a No Connect or connected to
VSS
Reserved. This signal should be
connected to VSS
Reserved. This signal should be
connected to VSS
Reserved. This signal should be
.
RSV05
RSV06
RSV07
N2
M2
K2
A
I/O/Z
.
PWR
.
GND
connected to VSS
.
NC
H8
P6
No connect
VDD_VIN
PWR
Power for Digital Video Input IO (3.3
V)
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
53
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
P7
P8
F6
F7
F8
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
VDD_VIN
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
Power for Digital Video Input IO (3.3
V)
VDD_VIN
Power for Digital Video Input IO (3.3
V)
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
VDD_VOUT
Power for Digital Video Output IO
(3.3 V)
Power for Digital Video Output IO
(3.3 V)
Power for Digital Video Output IO
(3.3 V)
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDD_DDR
VDDA_PLL1
VDDA_PLL2
CVDD
M9
P9
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Power for DDR I/O (1.8 V)
Analog Power for PLL1 (1.3 V)
Analog Power for PLL2 (1.3 V)
Core power (1.3 V)
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
R9
R12
T14
G12
H9
A1
CVDD
A10
B19
C4
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
G6
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
G11
H10
H13
H17
J11
J12
J13
K6
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
K11
K12
L11
L12
N6
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
R7
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
R8
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
T17
W19
F9
Core power (1.3 V)
CVDD
Core power (1.3 V)
VDD
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
VDD
F10
F11
VDD
54
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS_MX1
VSS_MX2
VSSA_PLL1
VSSA_PLL2
VSS
F12
F13
F14
G8
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
Power for Digital IO (3.3 V)
System oscillator (24 MHz) - ground
Video oscillator (27 MHz) - ground
Analog Ground for PLL1
Analog Ground for PLL2
Digital ground
G14
K8
K15
L6
L13
M10
M11
M12
M13
N11
N12
C10
P1
H12
J9
A5
VSS
A8
Digital ground
VSS
A19
B5
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
B8
Digital ground
VSS
B10
D1
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
E2
Digital ground
VSS
E15
G2
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
G9
Digital ground
VSS
H1
Digital ground
VSS
H2
Digital ground
VSS
H6
Digital ground
VSS
H11
H14
J2
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
J6
Digital ground
VSS
J10
J14
K3
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
K9
Digital ground
VSS
K10
K14
L2
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
Digital ground
VSS
L9
Digital ground
VSS
L10
Digital ground
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
55
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 2-23. DM355 Pin Descriptions (continued)
Name
BGA Type( Grou
Power
PU Reset
Description(4)
Mux Control
1)
ID
p
Supply(2) PD(3 State
)
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
L14
M6
M7
M8
M14
M17
N1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
Digital ground
N8
N9
N14
R2
R6
T2
T5
T15
U1
U2
U3
U4
U9
U14
U17
V1
V18
W1
56
Device Overview
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
2.6 Device Support
2.6.1 Development Tools
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for DM355 systems, including tools to evaluate the
performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully integrate and
debug software and hardware modules. The tools support documentation is electronically available within
the Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE).
The following products support development of DM355 based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS™) Emulator EVM (Evaluation Module)
For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized
distributor.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Overview
57
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3 Detailed Device Description
This section provides a detailed overview of the DM355 device.
3.1 ARM Subsystem Overview
The ARM Subsystem contains components required to provide the ARM926EJ-S (ARM) master control of
the overall DM355 system, including the components of the ARM Subsystem, the peripherals, and the
external memories.
The ARM is responsible for handling system functions such as system-level initialization, configuration,
user interface, user command execution, connectivity functions, interface and control of the subsystem,
etc. The ARM is master and performs these functions because it has a large program memory space and
fast context switching capability, and is thus suitable for complex, multi-tasking, and general-purpose
control tasks.
3.1.1 Components of the ARM Subsystem
The ARM Subsystem in DM355 consists of the following components:
•
ARM926EJ-S RISC processor, including:
–
–
–
–
–
–
coprocessor 15 (CP15)
MMU
16KB Instruction cache
8KB Data cache
Write Buffer
Java accelerator
•
ARM Internal Memories
–
–
32KB Internal RAM (32-bit wide access)
8KB Internal ROM (ARM bootloader for non-AEMIF boot options)
•
•
Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)
System Control Peripherals
–
–
–
–
ARM Interrupt Controller
PLL Controller
Power and Sleep Controller
System Control Module
The ARM also manages/controls all the device peripherals:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DDR2 / mDDR EMIF Controller
AEMIF Controller, including the OneNAND and NAND flash interface
Enhanced DMA (EDMA)
UART
Timers
Real Time Out (RTO)
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
Inter-IC Communication (I2C)
Multi-Media Card/Secure Digital (MMC/SD)
Audio Serial Port (ASP)
Universal Serial Bus Controller (USB)
Serial Port Interface (SPI)
Video Processing Front End (VPFE)
–
CCD Controller (CCDC)
58
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
–
–
Image Pipe (IPIPE)
H3A Engine (Hardware engine for computing Auto-focus, Auto white balance, and Auto exposure)
•
Video Processing Back End (VPBE)
–
–
On Screen Display (OSD)
Video Encoder Engine (VENC)
Figure 3-1 shows the functional block diagram of the DM355 ARM Subsystem.
ARM
Master
Interrupt
Controller
(AINTC)
Master IF
IF
Arbiter
Arbiter
I-AHB
D-AHB
System
Control
I-TCM
D-TCM
Slave
IF
ARM926EJ-S
Arbiter
PLLC2
PLLC1
Power
Sleep
16K I$
8K D$
CP15
MMU
8K
16K
16K
Controller
(PSC)
ROM
RAM1
RAM0
Peripherals
...
Figure 3-1. DM355 ARM Subsystem Block Diagram
3.2 ARM926EJ-S RISC CPU
The ARM Subsystem integrates the ARM926EJ-S processor. The ARM926EJ-S processor is a member of
ARM9 family of general-purpose microprocessors. This processor is targeted at multi-tasking applications
where full memory management, high performance, low die size, and low power are all important. The
ARM926EJ-S processor supports the 32-bit ARM and 16 bit THUMB instruction sets, enabling the user to
trade off between high performance and high code density. Specifically, the ARM926EJ-S processor
supports the ARMv5TEJ instruction set, which includes features for efficient execution of Java byte codes,
providing Java performance similar to Just in Time (JIT) Java interpreter, but without associated code
overhead.
The ARM926EJ-S processor supports the ARM debug architecture and includes logic to assist in both
hardware and software debug. The ARM926EJ-S processor has a Harvard architecture and provides a
complete high performance subsystem, including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ARM926EJ -S integer core
CP15 system control coprocessor
Memory Management Unit (MMU)
Separate instruction and data Caches
Write buffer
Separate instruction and data Tightly-Coupled Memories (TCMs) [internal RAM] interfaces
Separate instruction and data AHB bus interfaces
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
59
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
•
Embedded Trace Module and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETM/ETB)
For more complete details on the ARM9, refer to the ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference Manual, available
at http://www.arm.com
3.2.1 CP15
The ARM926EJ-S system control coprocessor (CP15) is used to configure and control instruction and
data caches, Tightly-Coupled Memories (TCMs), Memory Management Unit (MMU), and other ARM
subsystem functions. The CP15 registers are programmed using the MRC and MCR ARM instructions,
when the ARM in a privileged mode such as supervisor or system mode.
3.2.2 MMU
The ARM926EJ-S MMU provides virtual memory features required by operating systems such as Linux,
WindowCE, ultron, ThreadX, etc. A single set of two level page tables stored in main memory is used to
control the address translation, permission checks and memory region attributes for both data and
instruction accesses. The MMU uses a single unified Translation Lookaside Buffer (TLB) to cache the
information held in the page tables. The MMU features are:
•
•
Standard ARM architecture v4 and v5 MMU mapping sizes, domains and access protection scheme.
Mapping sizes are:
–
–
–
–
1MB (sections)
64KB (large pages)
4KB (small pages)
1KB (tiny pages)
•
Access permissions for large pages and small pages can be specified separately for each quarter of
the page (subpage permissions)
•
•
•
•
Hardware page table walks
Invalidate entire TLB, using CP15 register 8
Invalidate TLB entry, selected by MVA, using CP15 register 8
Lockdown of TLB entries, using CP15 register 10
3.2.3 Caches and Write Buffer
The size of the Instruction Cache is 16KB, Data cache is 8KB. Additionally, the Caches have the following
features:
•
•
Virtual index, virtual tag, and addressed using the Modified Virtual Address (MVA)
Four-way set associative, with a cache line length of eight words per line (32-bytes per line) and with
two dirty bits in the Dcache
•
Dcache supports write-through and write-back (or copy back) cache operation, selected by memory
region using the C and B bits in the MMU translation tables.
•
•
Critical-word first cache refilling
Cache lockdown registers enable control over which cache ways are used for allocation on a line fill,
providing a mechanism for both lockdown, and controlling cache corruption
•
Dcache stores the Physical Address TAG (PA TAG) corresponding to each Dcache entry in the TAG
RAM for use during the cache line write-backs, in addition to the Virtual Address TAG stored in the
TAG RAM. This means that the MMU is not involved in Dcache write-back operations, removing the
possibility of TLB misses related to the write-back address.
•
Cache maintenance operations provide efficient invalidation of, the entire Dcache or Icache, regions of
the Dcache or Icache, and regions of virtual memory.
60
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
The write buffer is used for all writes to a noncachable bufferable region, write-through region and write
misses to a write-back region. A separate buffer is incorporated in the Dcache for holding write-back for
cache line evictions or cleaning of dirty cache lines. The main write buffer has 16-word data buffer and a
four-address buffer. The Dcache write-back has eight data word entries and a single address entry.
3.2.4 Tightly Coupled Memory (TCM)
ARM internal RAM is provided for storing real-time and performance-critical code/data and the Interrupt
Vector table. ARM internal ROM boot options include—NAND, UART, USB, and MMC/SD. The RAM and
ROM memories interfaced to the ARM926EJ-S via the tightly coupled memory interface that provides for
separate instruction and data bus connections. Since the ARM TCM does not allow instructions on the
D-TCM bus or data on the I-TCM bus, an arbiter is included so that both data and instructions can be
stored in the internal RAM/ROM. The arbiter also allows accesses to the RAM/ROM from extra-ARM
sources (e.g., EDMA or other masters). The ARM926EJ-S has built-in DMA support for direct accesses to
the ARM internal memory from a non-ARM master. Because of the time-critical nature of the TCM link to
the ARM internal memory, all accesses from non-ARM devices are treated as DMA transfers.
Instruction and Data accesses are differentiated via accessing different memory map regions, with the
instruction region from 0x0000 through 0x7FFF and data from 0x10000 through 0x17FFF. Placing the
instruction region at 0x0000 is necessary to allow the ARM Interrupt Vector table to be placed at 0x0000,
as required by the ARM architecture. The internal 32-KB RAM is split into two physical banks of 16KB
each, which allows simultaneous instruction and data accesses to be accomplished if the code and data
are in separate banks.
3.2.5 Advanced High-performance Bus (AHB)
The ARM Subsystem uses the AHB port of the ARM926EJ-S to connect the ARM to the configuration bus
and the external memories. Arbiters are employed to arbitrate access to the separate D-AHB and I-AHB
by the configuration bus and the external memories bus.
3.2.6 Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM) and Embedded Trace Buffer (ETB)
To support real-time trace, the ARM926EJ-S processor provides an interface to enable connection of an
Embedded Trace Macrocell (ETM). The ARM926ES-J Subsystem in DM355 also includes the Embedded
Trace Buffer (ETB). The ETM consists of two parts:
•
•
Trace Port provides real-time trace capability for the ARM9.
Triggering facilities provide trigger resources, which include address and data comparators, counter,
and sequencers.
The DM355 trace port is not pinned out and is instead only connected to the Embedded Trace Buffer. The
ETB has a 4KB buffer memory. ETB enabled debug tools are required to read/interpret the captured trace
data.
3.3 Memory Mapping
The ARM memory map is shown in Table 2-2 and Table 2-3. This section describes the memories and
interfaces within the ARM's memory map.
3.3.1 ARM Internal Memories
The ARM has access to the following ARM internal memories:
•
32KB ARM Internal RAM on TCM interface, logically separated into two 16KB pages to allow
simultaneous access on any given cycle if there are separate accesses for code (I-TCM bus) and data
(D-TCM) to the different memory regions.
•
8KB ARM Internal ROM
3.3.2 External Memories
The ARM has access to the following External memories:
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
61
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
•
•
•
•
DDR2 / mDDR Synchronous DRAM
Asynchronous EMIF / OneNAND
NAND Flash
Flash card devices:
–
–
–
MMC/SD
xD
SmartMedia
3.3.3 Peripherals
The ARM has access to all of the peripherals on the DM355 device.
3.4 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC)
The DM355 ARM Interrupt Controller (AINTC) has the following features:
•
•
•
Supports up to 64 interrupt channels (16 external channels)
Interrupt mask for each channel
Each interrupt channel can be mapped to a Fast Interrupt Request (FIQ) or to an Interrupt Request
(IRQ) type of interrupt.
•
•
•
Hardware prioritization of simultaneous interrupts
Configurable interrupt priority (2 levels of FIQ and 6 levels of IRQ)
Configurable interrupt entry table (FIQ and IRQ priority table entry) to reduce interrupt processing time
The ARM core supports two interrupt types: FIQ and IRQ. See the ARM926EJ-S Technical Reference
Manual for detailed information about the ARM’s FIQ and IRQ interrupts. Each interrupt channel is
mappable to an FIQ or to an IRQ type of interrupt, and each channel can be enabled or disabled. The
INTC supports user-configurable interrupt-priority and interrupt entry addresses. Entry addresses minimize
the time spent jumping to interrupt service routines (ISRs). When an interrupt occurs, the corresponding
highest priority ISR’s address is stored in the INTC’s ENTRY register. The IRQ or FIQ interrupt routine can
read the ENTRY register and jump to the corresponding ISR directly. Thus, the ARM does not require a
software dispatcher to determine the asserted interrupt.
3.4.1 Interrupt Mapping
The AINTC takes up to 64 ARM device interrupts and maps them to either the IRQ or to the FIQ of the
ARM. Each interrupt is also assigned one of 8 priority levels (2 for FIQ, 6 for IRQ). For interrupts with the
same priority level, the priority is determined by the hardware interrupt number (the lowest number has the
highest priority). Table 3-1 shows the connection of device interrupts to the ARM.
Table 3-1. AINTC Interrupt Connections(1)
Interrupt
Number
Acronym
Source
Interrupt
Number
Acronym
Source
0
VPSSINT0
VPSS - INT0,
Configurable via
VPSSBL register:
INTSEL
32
TINT0
Timer 0 - TINT12
1
2
3
4
5
6
VPSSINT1
VPSSINT2
VPSSINT3
VPSSINT4
VPSSINT5
VPSSINT6
VPSS - INT1
VPSS - INT2
VPSS - INT3
VPSS - INT4
VPSS - INT5
VPSS - INT6
33
34
35
36
37
38
TINT1
Timer 0 - TINT34
Timer 1 - TINT12
Timer 1 - TINT34
PWM0
TINT2
TINT3
PWMINT0
PWMINT1
PWMINT2
PWM 1
PWM2
(1) The total number of interrupts in DM355 exceeds 64, which is the maximum value of the AINTC module. Therefore, several interrupts
are multiplexed and you must use the register ARM_INTMUX in the System Control Module to select the interrupt source for multiplexed
interrupts.
62
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 3-1. AINTC Interrupt Connections (continued)
Interrupt
Number
Acronym
Source
Interrupt
Number
Acronym
Source
7
8
VPSSINT7
VPSSINT8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
USBINT
VPSS - INT7
VPSS - INT8
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
I2CINT
I2C
UARTINT0
UARTINT1
SPINT0-0
SPINT0-1
GPIO0
UART0
UART1
SPI0
9
10
11
12
13
SPI0
USB OTG Collector
GPIO
GPIO
RTOINT or
TINT4
RTO or
Timer 2 - TINT12
SYS.ARM_INTMUX
GPIO1
14
UARTINT2 or
TINT5
UART2 or
Timer 2 - TINT34
46
GPIO2
GPIO
15
16
17
TINT6
Timer 3 TINT12
47
48
49
GPIO3
GPIO4
GPIO5
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
CCINT0
EDMA CC Region 0
SPINT1-0 or
CCERRINT
SPI1 or
EDMA CC Error
18
19
SPINT1-1 or
TCERRINT0
SPI1 or
EDMA TC0 Error
50
51
GPIO6
GPIO7
GPIO
GPIO
SPINT2-0 or
TCERRINT1
SPI2 or
EDMA TC1 Error
20
21
22
23
24
PSCINT
SPINT2-1
TINT7
PSC - ALLINT
SPI2
52
53
54
55
56
GPIO8
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO9
Timer3 - TINT34
MMC/SD0
GPIOBNK0
GPIOBNK1
GPIOBNK2
SDIOINT0
MBXINT0 or
MBXINT1
ASP0 or
ASP1
25
MBRINT0 or
MBRINT1
ASP0 or
ASP1
57
GPIOBNK3
GPIO
26
27
28
29
30
31
MMCINT0
MMCINT1
PWMINT3
DDRINT
MMC/SD0
MMC/SC1
PWM3
58
59
60
61
62
63
GPIOBNK4
GPIOBNK5
GPIOBNK6
COMMTX
COMMRX
EMUINT
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
DDR EMIF
Async EMIF
SDIO1
ARMSS
ARMSS
E2ICE
AEMIFINT
SDIOINT1
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
63
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.5 Device Clocking
3.5.1 Overview
The DM355 requires one primary reference clock . The reference clock frequency may be generated
either by crystal input or by external oscillator. The reference clock is the clock at the pins named
MXI1/MXO1. The reference clock drives two separate PLL controllers (PLLC1 and PLLC2). PLLC1
generates the clocks required by the ARM, MPEG4 and JPEG coprocessor, VPBE, VPSS, and
peripherals. PLL2 generates the clock required by the DDR PHY. A block diagram of DM355's clocking
architecture is shown in Figure 3-2. The PLLs are described further in Section 3.6.
64
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
SYSCLKBP
AUXCLK
CLKOUT2
UART0, 1
I2C
BPDIV (/3)
Reference Clock
(MXI/MXO)
24 MHz or 36 MHz
AUXCLK (/1)
SYSCLK1
PLLDIV1 (/2)
ARM Subsystem
MPEG/JPEG
Coprocessor
PWMs (x4)
Timers (x4)
RTO
CLKOUT1
Reference
Clock
(MXI/MXO)
(24 MHz or
36 MHz)
SYSCLK2
PLLDIV2 (/4)
USB Phy
SYSCLK3
SYSCLK4
60 MHz
USB
PLLDIV3 (/n)
PLLDIV4 (/4 or /2)
VPSS
EMIF/NAND
MMC/SD (x2)
SPI (x3)
PLL Controller 1
VPFE
VPBE
PCLK
ASP (x2)
EXTCLK
GPIO
ARM INTC
DAC
UART2
EDMA
SYSCLK1
PLLDIV1 (/1)
DDR PHY
DDR
Bus Logic
Sys Logic
PSC
SYSCLKBP
BPDIV (/8)
CLKOUT3
PLL Controller 2
IcePick
Sequencer
Figure 3-2. Device Clocking Block Diagram
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
65
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.5.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-135
This section describes the only supported device clocking configurations for DM355-135. The DM355
supports either 24 MHz (typical) or 36 MHz reference clock (crystal or external oscillator input).
Configurations are shown for both cases.
Note: DM355-135 devices support only commercial temperature ranges.
3.5.2.1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-135 (24 MHz reference)
3.5.2.1.1 DM355-135 PLL1 (24 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-135 PLL1 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-135 (24 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL1
VCO
ARM /
MPEG4 and JPEG
Coprocessor
Peripherals
VENC
VPSS
(/8 fixed)
(m programmable)
(/2 or /1
programmable)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1 SYSCLK1 PLLDIV2
SYSCLK2
(MHz)
PLLDIV3
(/n
SYSCLK3
(MHz)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2
SYSCLK4
(MHz)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
(/4 fixed)
programmable)
programmable)
bypass
bypass
180
bypass
bypass
270
2
2
2
2
2
2
12
135
121.5
108
94.5
81
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
10
10
9
2.4
27
27
27
27
27
4
2
2
2
2
2
6
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
67.5
60.75
54
135
121.5
108
94.5
81
162
243
144
216
8
126
189
47.25
40.5
7
108
162
6
3.5.2.1.2 DM355-135 PLL2 (24 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-135 PLL2 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-135 (24 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL2 VCO
DDR PHY
DDR Clock
(/n programmable)
(m programmable)
(/1 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/1 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
DDR_CLK
(MHz)
bypass
12
bypass
133
bypass
bypass
266
1
1
1
1
24
12
133
100
80
1
1
1
266
200
160
12
100
200
15
100
160
66
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.5.2.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-135 (36 MHz reference)
3.5.2.2.1 DM355-135PLL1 (36 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-135 PLL1 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-4.
Table 3-4. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations DM355-135 (36 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
/2 or /1
programmable
PLL1
VCO
ARM /
MPEG4 and JPEG
Coprocessor
Peripherals
VENC
VPSS
(/8 fixed)
(m
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/2 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
PLLDIV2
(/4 fixed)
SYSCLK2
(MHz)
PLLDIV3
(/n
SYSCLK3
(MHz)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2
SYSCLK4
(MHz)
programmable)
programmable)
programmable)
bypass
bypass
120
bypass
bypass
270
2
2
2
2
18
135
4
4
4
4
9
10
10
9
3.6
27
27
27
4
2
2
2
18
135
8
8
8
2
2
2
67.5
60.75
54
108
243
121.5
108
121.5
108
96
216
8
3.5.2.2.2 DM355-135 PLL2 (36 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-135 PLL2 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-5.
Table 3-5. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-135 (36 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL2 VCO
DDR PHY
DDR Clock
(/n programmable)
(m programmable)
(/1 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/1 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
DDR_CLK
(MHz)
bypass
18
bypass
133
bypass
bypass
266
1
1
1
1
36
18
133
100
80
1
1
1
266
200
160
27
150
200
27
120
160
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
67
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.5.3 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216
This section describes the only supported device clocking configurations for DM355-216. The DM355
supports either 24 MHz (typical) or 36 MHz reference clock (crystal or external oscillator input).
Configurations are shown for both cases.
3.5.3.1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (24 MHz reference)
3.5.3.1.1 DM355-216 PLL1 (24 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL1 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-2.
Table 3-6. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (24 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL1
VCO
ARM /
MPEG4 and JPEG
Coprocessor
Peripherals
VENC
VPSS
(/8 fixed)
(m programmable)
(/2 or /1
programmable)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1 SYSCLK1 PLLDIV2
SYSCLK2
(MHz)
PLLDIV3
(/n
SYSCLK3
(MHz)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2
SYSCLK4
(MHz)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
(/4 fixed)
programmable)
programmable)
bypass
bypass
144
135
126
117
108
99
bypass
bypass
432
405
378
351
324
297
270
243
216
189
162
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
12
216
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
10
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
2.4
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
6
108
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
108
202.5
189
101.25
94.5
87.75
81
101.25
94.5
87.75
81
175.5
162
148.5
135
74.25
67.5
60.75
54
74.25
135
180
162
144
126
108
121.5
108
121.5
108
8
94.5
81
47.25
40.5
7
94.5
81
6
3.5.3.1.2 DM355-216 PLL2 (24 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL2 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-3.
Table 3-7. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (24 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL2 VCO
DDR PHY
DDR Clock
(/n programmable)
(m programmable)
(/1 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/1 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
DDR_CLK
(MHz)
bypass
bypass
114
108
102
96
bypass
bypass
342
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
24
12
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
342
324
306
288
266
200
160
171
162
153
144
133
100
80
324
8
306
8
288
12
12
15
133
100
100
266
200
160
68
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.5.3.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (36 MHz reference)
3.5.3.2.1 DM355-216 PLL1 (36 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL1 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-4.
Table 3-8. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations DM355-216 (36 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL1
VCO
ARM /
MPEG4 and JPEG
Coprocessor
Peripherals
VENC
VPSS
(/8 fixed)
(m programmable)
(/2 or /1
programmable)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1 SYSCLK1 PLLDIV2
SYSCLK2
(MHz)
PLLDIV3
(/n
SYSCLK3
(MHz)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2
SYSCLK4
(MHz)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
(/4 fixed)
programmable)
programmable)
bypass
bypass
96
bypass
bypass
432
405
378
351
324
297
270
243
216
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
18
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
9
10
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
3.6
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
216
108
108
180
168
156
144
132
120
108
96
202.5
189
101.25
94.5
87.75
81
101.25
94.5
87.75
81
175.5
162
148.5
135
74.25
67.5
60.75
54
74.25
135
121.5
108
121.5
108
8
3.5.3.2.2 DM355-216 PLL2 (36 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-216 PLL2 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-5.
Table 3-9. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-216 (36 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL2 VCO
DDR PHY
DDR Clock
(/n programmable)
(m programmable)
(/1 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/1 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
DDR_CLK
(MHz)
bypass
12
bypass
114
108
102
96
bypass
bypass
342
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
36
18
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
342
324
306
288
266
200
160
171
162
153
144
133
100
80
12
324
12
306
12
288
18
133
150
120
266
27
200
27
160
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
69
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.5.4 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270
This section describes the only supported device clocking configurations for DM355-270. The DM355
supports either 24 MHz (typical) or 36 MHz reference clock (crystal or external oscillator input).
Configurations are shown for both cases.
Note : DM355-270 devices support only commercial temperature ranges.
3.5.4.1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)
3.5.4.1.1 DM355-270 PLL1 (24 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL1 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-2.
Table 3-10. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
/2 or /1
programmable
PLL1
VCO
ARM /
MPEG4 and JPEG
Coprocessor
Peripherals
VENC
VPSS
(/8 fixed)
(m programmable)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1 SYSCLK1 PLLDIV2
SYSCLK2
(MHz)
PLLDIV3
(/n programmable)
SYSCLK3
(MHz)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2
SYSCLK4
(MHz)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
(/4 fixed)
programmable)
bypass
bypass
180
171
162
153
144
135
126
117
108
99
bypass
bypass
540
513
486
459
432
405
378
351
324
297
270
243
216
189
162
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
12
270
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
2.4
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
135
135
256.5
243
128.25
121.5
114.75
108
128.25
121.5
114.75
108
229.5
216
202.5
189
101.25
94.5
101.25
94.5
87.75
81
175.5
162
87.75
81
148.5
135
74.25
67.5
74.25
135
180
162
144
126
108
121.5
108
60.75
54
121.5
108
8
94.5
81
47.25
40.5
7
94.5
81
6
3.5.4.1.2 DM355-270 PLL2 (24 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL2 with 24 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-3.
Table 3-11. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (24 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL2 VCO
DDR PHY
DDR Clock
(/n programmable)
(m programmable)
(/1 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/1 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
DDR_CLK
(MHz)
bypass
bypass
144
138
132
126
120
114
108
102
96
bypass
bypass
432
414
396
378
360
342
324
306
288
266
200
160
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
24
12
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
432
414
396
378
360
342
324
306
288
266
200
160
216
207
198
189
180
171
162
153
144
133
100
80
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
12
12
15
133
100
100
70
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.5.4.2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)
3.5.4.2.1 DM355-270 PLL1 (36 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL1 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-4.
Table 3-12. PLL1 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
/2 or /1
programmab
le
PLL1
VCO
ARM /
MPEG4 and JPEG
Coprocessor
Peripherals
VENC
VPSS
(/8 fixed)
(m programmable)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1 SYSCLK1 PLLDIV2
SYSCLK2
(MHz)
PLLDIV3
(/n programmable)
SYSCLK3
(MHz)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2
SYSCLK4
(MHz)
(/2 fixed)
(MHz)
(/4 fixed)
programmable)
bypass
bypass
120
114
108
102
96
bypass
bypass
540
513
486
459
432
405
378
351
324
297
270
243
216
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
18
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
9
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
3.6
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
18
135
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
270
135
256.5
243
128.25
121.5
114.75
108
128.25
121.5
114.75
108
229.5
216
180
168
156
144
132
120
108
96
202.5
189
101.25
94.5
202.5
189
175.5
162
87.75
81
175.5
162
148.5
135
74.25
67.5
148.5
135
121.5
108
60.75
54
121.5
108
8
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
71
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.5.4.2.2 DM355-270 PLL2 (36 MHz reference)
All supported clocking configurations for DM355-270 PLL2 with 36 MHz reference clock are shown in
Table 3-5.
Table 3-13. PLL2 Supported Clocking Configurations for DM355-270 (36 MHz reference)
PREDIV
PLLM
POSTDIV
PLL2 VCO
DDR PHY
DDR Clock
(/n programmable)
(m programmable)
(/1 fixed)
(MHz)
PLLDIV1
(/1 fixed)
SYSCLK1
(MHz)
DDR_CLK
(MHz)
bypass
12
bypass
144
138
132
126
120
114
108
102
96
bypass
bypass
432
414
396
378
360
342
324
306
288
266
200
160
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
36
18
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
432
414
396
378
360
342
324
306
288
266
200
160
216
207
198
189
180
171
162
153
144
133
100
80
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
18
133
150
120
27
27
72
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.5.5 Peripheral Clocking Considerations
3.5.5.1 Video Processing Back End Clocking
The Video Processing Back End (VPBE) is a sub-module of the Video Processing Subsystem (VPSS).
The VPBE is designed to interface with a variety of LCDs and an internal DAC module. There are two
asynchronous clock domains in the VPBE: an internal clock domain and an external clock domain. The
internal clock domain is driven by the VPSS clock (PLL1 SYSCLK4). The external clock domain is
configurable; you can select one of five source:
•
•
•
•
•
24 MHz crystal input at MXI1
27 MHz crystal input at MXI2 (optional feature, not typically used)
PLL1 SYSCLK3
EXTCLK pin (external VPBE clock input pin)
PCLK pin (VPFE pixel clock input pin)
3.5.5.2 USB Clocking
The USB Controller is driven by two clocks: an output clock of PLL1 (SYSCLK2) and an output clock of
the USB PHY.
NOTE
For proper USB 2.0 function, SYSCLK2 must be greater than 60 MHz.
The USB PHY takes an input clock that is configurable by the USB PHY clock source bits (PHYCLKSRC)
in the USB PHY control register (USB_PHY_CTL) in the System Control Module. When a 24 MHz crystal
is used at MXI1/MXO1, set PHYCLKSRC to 0. This will present a 24 MHz clock to the USB PHY. When a
36 MHz crystal is used at MXI1/MXO1, set PHYCLKSRC to 1. This will present a 12 MHz clock (36 MHz
divided internally by three) to the USB PHY. The USB PHY is capable of accepting only 24 MHz and 12
MHz; thus you must use either a 24 MHz or 36 MHz crystal at MXI1/MXO1.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
73
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.6 PLL Controller (PLLC)
This section describes the PLL Controllers for PLL1 and PLL2.
3.6.1 PLL Controller Module
The DM355 has two PLL controllers that provide clocks to different components of the chip. PLL controller
1 (PLLC1) provides clocks to most of the components of the chip. PLL controller 2 (PLLC2) provides
clocks to the DDR PHY.
As a module, the PLL controller provides the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Glitch-free transitions (on changing PLL settings)
Domain clocks alignment
Clock gating
PLL bypass
PLL power down
The various clock outputs given by the PLL controller are as follows:
•
•
•
Domain clocks: SYSCLKn
Bypass domain clock: SYSCLKBP
Auxiliary clock from reference clock: AUXCLK
Various dividers that can be used are as follows:
•
•
•
•
Pre-PLL divider: PREDIV
Post-PLL divider: POSTDIV
SYSCLK divider: PLLDIV1, …, PLLDIVn
SYSCLKBP divider: BPDIV
Multipliers supported are as follows:
PLL multiplier control: PLLM
•
74
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.6.2 PLLC1
PLLC1 provides most of the DM355 clocks. Software controls PLLC1 operation through the PLLC1
registers. The following list, Table 3-14, and Figure 3-3 describe the customizations of PLLC1 in the
DM355.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Provides primary DM355 system clock
Software configurable
Accepts clock input or internal oscillator input
PLL pre-divider value is fixed to (/8)
PLL multiplier value is programmable
PLL post-divider
Only SYSCLK[4:1] are used
SYSCLK1 divider value is fixed to (/2)
SYSCLK2 divider value is fixed to (/4)
SYSCLK3 divider value is programmable
SYSCLK4 divider value is programmable to (/4) or (/2)
SYSCLKBP divider value is fixed to (/3)
SYSCLK1 is routed to the ARM Subsystem
SYSCLK2 is routed to peripherals
SYSCLK3 is routed to the VPBE module
SYSCLK4 is routed to the VPSS module
AUXCLK is routed to peripherals with fixed clock domain and also to the output pin CLKOUT1
SYSCLKBP is routed to the output pin CLKOUT2
Table 3-14. PLLC1 Output Clocks
Output Clock
Used By
PLLDIV
Divider
Notes
SYSCLK1
SYSCLK2
SYSCLK3
ARM Subsystem / MPEG4 and JPEG Coprocessor
Peripherals
/2
/4
/n
Fixed divider
Fixed divider
VPBE (VENC module)
Programmable divider (used to get 27
MHz for VENC)
SYSCLK4
AUXCLK
VPSS
/4 or /2
none
/3
Programmable divider
No divider
Peripherals, CLKOUT1
CLKOUT2
SYSCLKBP
Fixed divider
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
75
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
CLKMODE
PLLEN
CLKIN
OSCIN
1
0
Post-DIV
(/2 or /1)
Pre-DIV
(/8)
SYSCLK1
(ARM and MPEG4/
JPEG Coprocessor)
PLL
1
0
PLLDIV1 (/2)
PLLDIV2 (/4)
PLLDIV3 (/3)
SYSCLK2
(Peripherals)
PLLM
(Programmable)
SYSCLK3
(VPBE)
SYSCLK4
(VPSS)
PLLDIV4
(/4 or /2)
AUXCLK
(Peripherals,
CLKOUT1)
SYSCLKBP
(CLKOUT2)
BPDIV (/3)
Figure 3-3. PLLC1 Configuration in DM355
76
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.6.3 PLLC2
PLLC2 provides the DDR PHY clock and CLKOUT3. Software controls PLLC2 operation through the
PLLC2 registers. The following list, Table 3-15, and Figure 3-4 describe the customizations of PLLC2 in
the DM355.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Provides DDR PHY clock and CLKOUT3
Software configurable
Accepts clock input or internal oscillator input (same input as PLLC1)
PLL pre-divider value is programmable
PLL multiplier value is programmable
PLL post-divider value is fixed to (/1)
Only SYSCLK[1] is used
SYSCLK1 divider value is fixed to (/1)
SYSCLKBP divider value is fixed to (/8)
SYSCLK1 is routed to the DDR PHY
SYSCLKBP is routed to the output pin CLKOUT3
AUXCLK is not used.
Table 3-15. PLLC2 Output Clocks
Output Clock
SYSCLK1
Used by
DDR PHY
CLKOUT3
PLLDIV Divider
Notes
/1
/8
Fixed divider
Fixed divider
SYSCLKBP
CLKMODE
PLLEN
CLKIN
OSCIN
1
Post-DIV
(/1)
Pre-DIV
(Programmable)
PLL
1
0
SYSCLK1
0
PLLDIV1 (/1)
(DDR PHY)
PLLM
(Programmable)
SYSCLKBP
(CLKOUT3)
BPDIV (/8)
Figure 3-4. PLLC2 Configuration in DM355
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
77
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.7 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)
In the DM355 system, the Power and Sleep Controller (PSC) is responsible for managing transitions of
system power on/off, clock on/off, and reset. A block diagram of the PSC is shown in Figure 3-5. Many of
the operations of the PSC are transparent to software, such as power-on-reset operations. However, the
PSC provides you with an interface to control several important clock and reset operations.
The PSC includes the following features:
•
•
Manages chip power-on/off, clock on/off, and resets
Provides a software interface to:
–
–
Control module clock ON/OFF
Control module resets
•
Supports IcePick emulation features: power, clock, and reset
DMSoC
ARM
PLLC
clks
arm_clock
arm_mreset
arm_power
PSC
Interrupt
AINTC
Emulation
MODx
RESET
module_clock
module_mreset
module_power
Always on
domain
VDD
Figure 3-5. DM355 Power and Sleep Controller (PSC)
3.8 System Control Module
The DM355’s system control module is a system-level module containing status and top-level control logic
required by the device. The system control module consists of a miscellaneous set of status and control
registers, accessible by the ARM and supporting all of the following system features and operations:
•
•
Device identification
Device configuration
–
–
Pin multiplexing control
Device boot configuration status
•
•
ARM interrupt and EDMA event multiplexing control
Special peripheral status and control
–
–
–
–
–
–
Timer64+
USB PHY control
VPSS clock and video DAC control and status
DDR VTP control
Clockout circuitry
GIO de-bounce control
•
Power management
78
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
–
Deep sleep mode
Bandwidth Management
Bus master DMA priority control
•
–
3.9 Pin Multiplexing
The DM355 makes extensive use of pin multiplexing to accommodate the large number of peripheral
functions in the smallest possible package. In order to accomplish this, pin multiplexing is controlled using
a combination of hardware configuration (at device reset) and software control. No attempt is made by the
DM355 hardware to ensure that the proper pin muxing has been selected for the peripherals or interface
mode being used, thus proper pin muxing configuration is the responsibility of the board and software
designers. An overview of the pin multiplexing is shown in Table 3-16.
Table 3-16. Peripheral Pin Mux Overview
Peripheral
VPFE (video in)
VPBE (video out)
AEMIF
Muxed With
GPIO and SPI2
GPIO, PWM, and RTO
GPIO
Primary Function
VPFE (video in)
VPBE (video out)
AEMIF
Secondary Function
Tertiary Function
GPIO
SPI2
PWM and RTO
GPIO
GPIO
none
ASP0
GPIO
ASP0
GPIO
none
MMC/SD1
CLKOUT
I2C
GPIO and UART2
GPIO
MMC/SD1
CLKOUT
I2C
GPIO
UART2
none
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO
none
UART1
GPIO
UART1
GPIO
none
SPI1
GPIO
SPI1
GPIO
none
SPI0
GPIO
SPI0
GPIO
none
3.9.1 Hardware Controlled Pin Multiplexing
Use the Asynchronous EMIF configuration pins (AECFG[3:0]) for hardware pin mux control. AECFG[3:0]
control the partitioning of the AEMIF addresses and GPIOs at reset, which allows you to properly
configure the number of AEMIF address pins required by the boot device while unused addresses pins are
available as GPIOs. These settings may be changed by software after reset by programming the PinMux2
register The PinMux2 register is in the System Control Module. As shown in Table 3-17, the number of
address bits enabled on the AEMIF is selectable from 0 to 16. Pins that are not assigned to another
peripheral and not enabled as address signals become GPIOs (except EM_A[2:1]). The enabled address
signals are always contiguous from EM_BA[1] upwards; bits cannot be skipped. The exception to this are
EM_A[2:1]. These signals (can be used to) represent the ALE and CLE signals for the NAND Flash mode
of the AEMIF and are always enabled. Note that EM_A[0] does not represent the lowest AEMIF address
bit. DM355 supports only 16-bit and 8-bit data widths for the AEMIF. In 16-bit mode, EM_BA[1] represents
the LS address bit (the half-word address) and EM_BA[0] represents the MS address bit (A[14]). In 8-bit
mode, EM_BA[1:0] represent the 2 LS address bits. Note that additional selections are available by
programming the PinMux2 register in software after boot. Note that AECFG selection of ‘0010’ selects
OneNAND interface. The AEMIF needs to operate in the half-rate mode (full_rate = 0) to meet frequency
requirements. Software should not change the PINMUX2 register setting to affect the AEMIF rate
operation. A soft reset of the AEMIF should be performed any time a rate change is made.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
79
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 3-17. AECFG (Async EMIF Configuration) Pin Mux Coding
1101(NAND)
1100
1010
1000 (8-bit SRAM)
0010 (16-bit SRAM,
OneNAND)
0000
GPIO[54]
GPIO[55]
GPIO[56]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
GPIO[57]
GPIO[58]
GPIO[59]
GPIO[60]
GPIO[61]
GPIO[62]
GPIO[63]
GPIO[64]
GPIO[65]
GPIO[66]
GPIO[67]
GPIO[46]
GPIO[47]
GPIO[48]
GPIO[49]
GPIO[50]
GPIO[51]
GPIO[52]
GPIO[53]
GPIO[54]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[13]
GPIO[46]
GPIO[47]
GPIO[48]
GPIO[49]
GPIO[50]
GPIO[51]
GPIO[52]
GPIO[53]
EM_A[14]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[13]
GPIO[46]
GPIO[47]
GPIO[48]
GPIO[49]
GPIO[50]
GPIO[51]
GPIO[52]
GPIO[53]
EM_BA[0]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[13]
GPIO[46]
GPIO[47]
GPIO[48]
GPIO[49]
GPIO[50]
GPIO[51]
GPIO[52]
GPIO[53]
EM_A[14]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[13]
EM_D[8]
EM_D[9]
EM_D[10]
EM_D[11]
EM_D[12]
EM_D[13]
EM_D[14]
EM_D[15]
EM_BA[0]
EM_BA[1]
EM_A[0]
EM_A[1]
EM_A[2]
EM_A[3]
EM_A[4]
EM_A[5]
EM_A[6]
EM_A[7]
EM_A[8]
EM_A[9]
EM_A[10]
EM_A[11]
EM_A[12]
EM_A[13]
EM_D[8]
EM_D[9]
EM_D[10]
EM_D[11]
EM_D[12]
EM_D[13]
EM_D[14]
EM_D[15]
3.9.2 Software Controlled Pin Multiplexing
All pin multiplexing options are configurable by software via pin mux registers that reside in the System
Control Module. The PinMux0 Register controls the Video In muxing, PinMux1 register controls Video Out
signals, PinMux2 register controls AEMIF signals, PinMux3 registers control the multiplexing of the GIO
signals, the PinMux4 register controls the SPI and MMC/SD0 signals.
3.10 Device Reset
There are five types of reset in DM355. The types of reset differ by how they are initiated and/or by their
effect on the chip. Each type is briefly described in Table 3-18 .
Table 3-18. Reset Types
Type
Initiator
Effect
POR (Power-On-Reset)
RESET pin low and TRST low
Total reset of the chip (cold reset). Resets all modules
including memory and emulation.
Warm Reset
RESET pin low and TRST high (initiated by ARM
emulator).
Resets all modules including memory, except ARM
emulation.
Max Reset
ARM emulator or Watchdog Timer (WDT).
ARM emulator
Same effect as warm reset.
System Reset
Resets all modules except memory and ARM
emulation. It is a soft reset that maintains memory
contents and does not affect or reset clocks or power
states.
80
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 3-18. Reset Types (continued)
Type
Initiator
Effect
Module Reset
ARM software
Resets a specific module. Allows the ARM to
independently reset any module. Module reset is
intended as a debug tool not as a tool to use in
production.
3.11 Default Device Configurations
After POR, warm reset, and max reset, the chip is in its default configuration. This section highlights the
default configurations associated with PLLs, clocks, ARM boot mode, and AEMIF.
NOTE
Default configuration is the configuration immediately after POR, warm reset, and max
reset and just before the boot process begins. The boot ROM updates the configuration.
See Section 3.12 for more information on the boot process.
3.11.1 Device Configuration Pins
The device configuration pins are described in Table 3-19. The device configuration pins are latched at
reset and allow you to configure all of the following options at reset:
•
•
ARM Boot Mode
Asynchronous EMIF pin configuration
These pins are described further in the following sections.
NOTE
The device configuration pins are multiplexed with AEMIF pins. After the device
configuration pins are sampled at reset, they automatically change to function as AEMIF
pins. Pin multiplexing is described in Section 3.8.
Table 3-19. Device Configuration
Default Setting (by
internal
Device
Configuration Input
Sampled
Pin
pull-up/
pull-down)
Function
Device Configuration Affected
BTSEL[1:0]
Selects ARM boot mode
00 = Boot from ROM (NAND)
01 = Boot from AEMIF
10 = Boot from ROM
EM_A[13:12]
00
(NAND)
If any ROM boot mode is selected, GIO61
is used to indicated boot status.
If NAND boot is selected, CE0 is used for
NAND. Use AECFG[3:0] to configure
AEMIF pins for NAND.
(MMC/SD or USB)
11 = Boot from ROM (UART)
If AEMIF boot is selected, CE0 is used for
AEMIF device (OneNAND, ROM). Use
AECFG[3:0] to configure AEMIF pins for
NAND.
If MMC/SD boot is selected, MMC/SD0 is
used.
AECFG[3:0]
Selects AEMIF pin
configuration
EM_A[11:8]
1101
(NAND)
Selects the AEMIF pin configuration. Refer
to pin-muxing information in Section 3.9.1.
Note that AECFG[3:0] affects both AEMIF
(BTSEL[1:0]=01) and NAND
(BTSEL[1:0]=00) boot modes.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
81
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.11.2 PLL Configuration
After POR, warm reset, and max reset, the PLLs and clocks are set to their default configurations. The
PLLs are in bypass mode and disabled by default. This means that the input reference clock at MXI1
(typically 24 MHz) drives the chip after reset. For more information on device clocking, see Section 3.5
and Section 3.6. The default state of the PLLs is reflected in the default state of the register bits in the
PLLC registers.
3.11.3 Power Domain and Module State Configuration
Only a subset of modules are enabled after reset by default. Table 3-20 shows which modules are
enabled after reset. Table 3-20 as shows that the following modules are enabled depending on the
sampled state of the device configuration pins: EDMA (CC, TC0 and TC1), AEMIF, MMC/SD0, UART0,
and Timer0. For example, UART0 is enabled after reset when the device configuration pins (BTSEL[1:0] =
11 - Enable UART) select UART boot mode.
82
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 3-20. Module Configuration
Default States
Module
Number
Module Name
Power Domain
Power Domain State
Module State
0
1
2
VPSS Master
VPSS Slave
EDMA (CC)
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
ON
ON
ON
SyncRst
SyncRst
BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)
BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)
3
EDMA (TC0)
AlwaysOn
ON
4
5
EDMA (TC1)
Timer3
SPI1
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SyncRst
SyncRst
6
7
MMC/SD1
ASP1
SyncRst
8
SyncRst
9
USB
SyncRst
10
11
12
13
14
PWM3
SPI2
SyncRst
SyncRst
RTO
SyncRst
DDR EMIF
AEMIF
SyncRst
BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)
BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)
BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – SyncRst (NAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – SyncRst (OneNAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – Enable (MMC/SD)
BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – SyncRst (UART)
15
MMC/SD0
AlwaysOn
ON
16
17
18
19
Reserved
ASP
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
ON
ON
ON
SyncRst
I2C
SyncRst
UART0
BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – SyncRst (NAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – SyncRst (OneNAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – SyncRst (MMC/SD)
BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
UART1
UART2
SPI0
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SyncRst
SyncRst
SyncRst
PWM0
PWM1
PWM2
GPIO
SyncRst
SyncRst
SyncRst
SyncRst
BTSEL[1:0] = 00 – Enable (NAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 01 – Enable (OneNAND)
BTSEL[1:0] = 10 – Enable (MMC/SD)
BTSEL[1:0] = 11 – Enable (UART)
SyncRst
TIMER0
28
29
30
31
TIMER1
TIMER2
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
ON
ON
ON
ON
Enable
System Module
ARM
Enable
Enable
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
83
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 3-20. Module Configuration (continued)
Default States
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
BUS
BUS
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
AlwaysOn
Reserved
Always On
ON
ON
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Reserved
SyncRst
BUS
ON
BUS
ON
BUS
ON
BUS
ON
BUS
ON
Reserved
VPSS DAC
Reserved
ON
3.11.4 ARM Boot Mode Configuration
The input pins BTSEL[1:0] determine whether the ARM will boot from its ROM or from the Asynchronous
EMIF (AEMIF). When ROM boot is selected (BTSEL[1:0] = 00, 10, or 11), a jump to the start of internal
ROM (address 0x0000: 8000) is forced into the first fetched instruction word. The embedded ROM boot
loader code (RBL) then performs certain configuration steps, reads the BOOTCFG register to determine
the desired boot method, and branches to the appropriate boot routine (i.e., a NAND, MMC/SD, or UART
loader routine).
If AEMIF boot is selected (BTSEL[1:0] = 01), a jump to the start of AEMIF (address 0x0200: 0000) is
forced into the first fetched instruction word. The ARM then continues executing from external
asynchronous memory using the default AEMIF timings until modified by software.
NOTE
For AEMIF boot, the OneNAND must be connected to the first AEMIF chip select space
(EM_CE0). Also, the AEMIF does not support direct execution from NAND Flash.
Boot modes are further described in Section 3.12.
3.11.5 AEMIF Configuration
3.11.5.1 AEMIF Pin Configuration
The input pins AECFG[3:0] determine the AEMIF configuration immediately after reset. Use AECFG[3:0]
to properly configure the pins of the AEMIF. Refer to the section on pin multiplexing in Section 3.9.
Also, see the Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF) Peripheral Reference Guide (literature
number SPRUED1) for more information on the AEMIF.
3.11.5.2 AEMIF Timing Configuration
When AEMIF is enabled, the wait state registers are reset to the slowest possible configuration, which is
88 cycles per access (16 cycles of setup, 64 cycles of strobe, and 8 cycles of hold). Thus, with a 24 MHz
clock at MXI1, the AEMIF is configured to run at 6 MHz/88 which equals approximately 68 kHz by default.
See the Asynchronous External Memory Interface (AEMIF) Peripheral Reference Guide (literature number
SPRUED1) for more information on the AEMIF.
3.12 Device Boot Modes
The DM355 ARM can boot from either Async EMIF (AEMIF/OneNand) or from ARM ROM, as determined
by the setting of the device configuration pins BTSEL[1:0]. The BTSEL[1:0] pins can define the ROM boot
mode further as well.
The boot selection pins (BTSEL[1:0]) determine the ARM boot process. After reset (POR, warm reset, or
max reset), ARM program execution begins in ARM ROM at 0x0000: 8000, except when BTSEL[1:0] = 01,
indicating AEMIF (AEMIF/OneNand) boot. See Section 3.11.1 for information on the boot selection pins.
84
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3.12.1 Boot Modes Overview
DM355’s ARM ROM boot loader (RBL) executes when the BTSEL[1:0] pins indicate a condition other than
the normal ARM EMIF boot.
•
If BTSEL[1:0] = 01 - Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF) boot. This mode is handled by hardware control and
does not involve the ROM. In the case of OneNAND, the user is responsible for putting any necessary
boot code in the OneNAND's boot page. This code shall configure the AEMIF module for the
OneNAND device. After the AEMIF module is configured, booting will continue immediately after the
OneNAND’s boot page with the AEMIF module managing pages thereafter.
•
The RBL supports 3 distinct boot modes:
–
–
–
BTSEL[1:0] = 00 - ARM NAND Boot
BTSEL[1:0] = 10 - ARM MMC/SD Boot
BTSEL[1:0] = 11 - ARM UART Boot
•
•
•
•
If NAND boot fails, then MMC/SD mode is tried.
If MMC/SD boot fails, then USB boot is tried. If USB boot fails, then USB boot is tried again.
If UART boot fails, then UART boot is tried again.
RBL uses GIO61 to indicate boot status (can use to blink LED):
–
–
–
–
–
–
After reset, GIO61 is initially driven low (e.g LED off)
If NAND boot fails,then GIO61 shall toggle at 4Hz while MMC/SD boot is tried.
If MMC/SD boot fails, then GIO61 shall toggle at 4Hz while USB boot is tried.
If USB boot fails, then GIO61 shall toggle at 4Hz while USB boot is tried again.
If UART boot fails, then GIO61 shall toggle at 2Hz while UART boot is retried.
When boot is successful, just before program control is given to UBL, GIO61 is driven high (e.g.
LED on)
–
DM355 Timer0 shall be used to accurately toggle GIO61 at 4Hz and 2Hz
•
ARM ROM Boot - NAND Mode
–
No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, copies a second stage user boot loader (UBL) from
NAND flash to ARM internal RAM (AIM) and transfers control to the user-defined UBL.
–
–
–
–
Support for NAND with page sizes up to 8192 bytes.
Support for magic number error detection and retry (up to 24 times) when loading UBL
Support for up to 30KB UBL (32KB IRAM - ~2KB for RBL stack)
Optional, user-selectable, support for use of DMA and I-cache during RBL execution (i.e.,while
loading UBL)
–
–
–
Supports booting from 8-bit NAND devices (16-bit NAND devices are not supported)
Supports 4-bit ECC (1-bit ECC is not supported)
Supports NAND flash that requires chip select to stay low during the tR read time
•
•
ARM ROM Boot - MMC/SD Mode
–
No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, copies a second stage User Boot Loader (UBL) from
MMC/SD to ARm Internal RAM (AIM) and transfers control to the user software.
–
–
–
Support for MMC/SD Native protocol (MMC/SD SPI protocol is not supported)
Support for descriptor error detection and retry (up to 24 times) when loading UBL
Support for up to 30KB UBL (32KB - ~2KB for RBL stack)
ARM ROM Boot - UART mode
–
No support for a full firmware boot. Instead, loads a second stage user boot loader (UBL) via UART
to ARM internal RAM (AIM) and transfers control to the user software.
–
Support for up to 30KB UBL (32KB - ~2KB for RBL stack)
The general boot sequence is shown in Figure 3-6.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
85
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Reset
Boot
mode
?
Internal ROM
Boot
mode
?
Boot from
UART
Boot from
NAND flash
No
No
Boot OK ?
Yes
Boot OK ?
Yes
Boot from
MMC/SD
No
Boot from
USB
Boot OK ?
Yes
No
Boot OK ?
Yes
Invoke
OneNAND
Invoke loaded
Program
Figure 3-6. Boot Mode Functional Block Diagram
3.13 Power Management
The DM355 is designed for minimal power consumption. There are two components to power
consumption: active power and leakage power. Active power is the power consumed to perform work and
scales with clock frequency and the amount of computations being performed. Active power can be
reduced by controlling the clocks in such a way as to either operate at a clock setting just high enough to
complete the required operation in the required timeline or to run at a clock setting until the work is
complete and then drastically cut the clocks (e.g. to PLL Bypass mode) until additional work must be
performed. Leakage power is due to static current leakage and occurs regardless of the clock rate.
Leakage, or standby power, is unavoidable while power is applied and scales roughly with the operating
junction temperatures. Leakage power can only be avoided by removing power completely from a device
or subsystem. The DM355 includes several power management features which are briefly described in
Table 3-17.
86
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 3-21. Power Management Features
Power Management Features
Description
Clock Management
Module clock disable
Module clocks can be disabled to reduce switching power
Module clock frequency scaling
PLL power-down
Module clock frequency can be scaled to reduce switching power
The PLLs can be powered-down when not in use to reduce
switching power
ARM Sleep Mode
Disable ARM clock to reduce active power
System Sleep Modes
ARM Wait-for-Interrupt sleep mode
Deep Sleep mode
Stop all device clocks and power down internal oscillators to reduce
active power to a minimum. Registers and memory are preserved.
I/O Management
USB Phy power-down
The USB Phy can be powered-down to reduce USB I/O power
The DAC's can be powered-down to reduce DAC power
DAC power-down
DDR self-refresh and power down
The DDR / mDDR device can be put into self-refresh and power
down states
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
87
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3.14 64-Bit Crossbar Architecture
The DM355 uses a 64-bit crossbar architecture to control access between device processors, subsystems
and peripherals. It includes an EDMA Controller consisting of a DMA Transfer Controller (TC) and a DMA
Channel Controller (CC). The TC provides two DMA channels for transfer between slave peripherals. The
CC provides a user and event interface to the EDMA system. It includes up to 64 event channels to which
all system synchronization events can be mapped and 8 auto submit “quick” channels (QDMA). In most
ways, these channels are identical. A channel refers to a specific ‘event’ that can cause a transfer to be
submitted to the TC as a Transfer Request.
3.14.1 Crossbar Connections
There are five transfer masters (TCs have separate read and write connections) connected to the
crossbar; ARM, the Video Processing Sub-system (VPSS), the master peripherals (USB), and two EDMA
transfer controllers. These can be connected to four separate slave ports; ARM, the DDR EMIF, and CFG
bus peripherals. Not all masters may connect to all slaves. Connection paths are indicated by √ at
intersection points shown in Table 3-22
Table 3-22. Crossbar Connection Matrix
Slave Module
DMA Master
ARM Internal
Memory
MPEG4/JPEG
Coprocessor
Memory
Config Bus Registers and
Memory
DDR EMIF Memory
ARM
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
VPSS
DMA Master Peripherals (USB)
EDMA3TC0
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
EDMA3TC1
3.14.2 EDMA Controller
The EDMA controller handles all data transfers between memories and the device slave peripherals on
the DM355 device. These are summarized as follows:
•
•
Transfer to/from on-chip memories
–
–
ARM program/data RAM
MPEG4/JPEG Coprocessor memory
Transfer to/from external storage
–
–
–
–
–
DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM
Asynchronous EMIF
OneNAND flash
NAND flash
Smart Media, SD, MMC, xD media storage
•
Transfer to/from peripherals
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ASP
SPI
I2C
PWM
RTO
GPIO
Timer/WDT
UART
MMC/SD
88
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
The EDMA Controller consists of two major blocks: the Transfer Controller (TC) and the Channel
Controller (CC). The CC is a highly flexible Channel Controller that serves as the user interface and event
interface for the EDMA system. The CC supports 64-event channels and 8 QDMA channels. The CC
consists of a scalable Parameter RAM (PaRAM) that supports flexible ping-pong, circular buffering,
channel-chaining, auto-reloading, and memory protection.
The EDMA Channel Controller has the following features:
•
Fully orthogonal transfer description
–
–
–
–
–
Three transfer dimensions
A-synchronized transfers: one dimension serviced per event
AB- synchronized transfers: two dimensions serviced per event
Independent indexes on source and destination
Chaining feature allows 3-D transfer based on single event
•
Flexible transfer definition
–
–
–
Increment and constant addressing modes
Linking mechanism allows automatic PaRAM set update
Chaining allows multiple transfers to execute with one event
•
•
•
Interrupt generation for:
–
–
DMA completion
Error conditions
Debug visibility
–
–
Queue watermarking/threshold
Error and status recording to facilitate debug
64 DMA channels
–
–
–
Event synchronization
Manual synchronization (CPU(s) write to event set register)
Chain synchronization (completion of one transfer chains to next)
•
•
8 QDMA channels
–
–
QDMA channels are triggered automatically upon writing to a PaRAM set entry
Support for programmable QDMA channel to PaRAM mapping
128 PaRAM sets
Each PaRAM set can be used for a DMA channel, QDMA channel, or link set (remaining)
–
•
•
•
Two transfer controllers/event queues. The system-level priority of these queues is user programmable
16 event entries per event queue
External events (for example, ASP TX Evt and RX Evt)
The EDMA Transfer Controller has the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
Two transfer controllers
64-bit wide read and write ports per channel
Up to four in-flight transfer requests (TR)
Programmable priority level
Supports two dimensional transfers with independent indexes on source and destination (EDMA3CC
manages the 3rd dimension)
•
•
Support for increment and constant addressing modes
Interrupt and error support
Parameter RAM: Each EDMA is specified by an eight word (32-byte) parameter table contained in
Parameter RAM (PaRAM) within the CC. DM355 provides 128 PaRAM entries, one for each of the 64
DMA channels and for 64 QDMA / Linked DMA entries.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
89
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
DMA Channels: Can be triggered by: " External events (for example, ASP TX Evt and RX Evt), " Software
writing a '1' to the given bit location, or channel, of the Event Set register, or, " Chaining to other DMAs.
QDMA: The Quick DMA (QDMA) function is contained within the CC. DM355 implements 8 QDMA
channels. Each QDMA channel has a selectable PaRAM entry used to specify the transfer. A QDMA
transfer is submitted immediately upon writing of the "trigger" parameter (as opposed to the occurrence of
an event as with EDMA). The QDMA parameter RAM may be written by any Config bus master through
the Config Bus and by DMAs through the Config Bus bridge.
QDMA Channels: Triggered by a configuration bus write to a designated 'QDMA trigger word'. QDMAs
allow a minimum number of linear writes (optimized for GEM IDMA feature) to be issued to the CC to
force a series of transfers to take place.
3.14.2.1 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events
The EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and external memory.
Table 3-23 lists the source of EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the programmable
EDMA channels. For the DM355 device, the association of an event to a channel is fixed; each of the
EDMA channels has one specific event associated with it. These specific events are captured in the
EDMA event registers (ER, ERH) even if the events are disabled by the EDMA event enable registers
(EER, EERH).
Table 3-23. DM355 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events(1)(2)
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
EVENT DESCRIPTION
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TIMER3: TINT6
TIMER3 TINT7
ASP0: XEVT
ASP0: REVT
VPSS: EVT1
VPSS: EVT2
VPSS: EVT3
VPSS: EVT4
Timer 3 Interrupt (TINT6) Event
Timer 3 Interrupt (TINT7) Event
ASP0 Transmit Event
ASP0 Receive Event
VPSS Event 1
VPSS Event 2
VPSS Event 3
VPSS Event 4
ASP1: XEVT or TIMER2:
TINT4
8
9
ASP1 Transmit Event or Timer 2 interrupt (TINT4) Event
ASP1 Receive Event or Timer 2 interrupt (TINT5) Event
ASP1: REVT or TIMER2:
TINT5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
SPI2: SPI2XEVT
SPI2: SPI2REVT
Reserved
SPI2 Transmit Event
SPI2 Receive Event
Reserved
SPI1: SPI1XEVT
SPI1: SPI1REVT
SPI0: SPI0XEVT
SPI0: SPI0REVT
UART0: URXEVT0
UART0: UTXEVT0
UART1: URXEVT1
UART1: UTXEVT1
UART2: URXEVT2
SPI1 Transmit Event
SPI1 Receive Event
SP0I Transmit Event
SPI0 Receive Event
UART 0 Receive Event
UART 0 Transmit Event
UART 1 Receive Event
UART 1 Transmit Event
UART 2 Receive Event
(1) In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or
intermediate transfer completion events.
(2) The total number of EDMA events in DM355 exceeds 64, which is the maximum value of the EDMA module. Therefore, several events
are multiplexed and you must use the register EDMA_EVTMUX in the System Control Module to select the event source for multiplexed
events.
90
Detailed Device Description
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 3-23. DM355 EDMA Channel Synchronization Events (continued)
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
EVENT DESCRIPTION
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56 - 63
UART2: UTXEVT2
Reserved
UART 2 Transmit Event
GPIO: GPINT9
MMC0RXEVT
MMC0TXEVT
I2CREVT
GPIO 9 Interrupt Event
MMC/SD0 Receive Event
MMC/SD0 Transmit Event
I2C Receive Event
I2CXEVT
I2C Transmit Event
MMC1RXEVT
MMC1TXEVT
GPINT0
MMC/SD1 Receive Event
MMC/SD1 Transmit Event
GPIO 0 Interrupt Event
GPIO 1 Interrupt Event
GPIO 2 Interrupt Event
GPIO 3 Interrupt Event
GPIO 4 Interrupt Event
GPIO 5 Interrupt Event
GPIO 6 Interrupt Event
GPIO 7 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 0 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 1 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 2 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 3 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 4 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 5 Interrupt Event
GPIO Bank 6 Interrupt Event
GPIO 8 Interrupt Event
Timer 0 Interrupt Event
Timer 1 Interrupt Event
Timer 2 Interrupt Event
Timer 3 Interrupt Event
PWM 0 Event
GPINT1
GPINT2
GPINT3
GPINT4
GPINT5
GPINT6
GPINT7
GPBNKINT0
GPBNKINT1
GPBNKINT2
GPBNKINT3
GPBNKINT4
GPBNKINT5
GPBNKINT6
GPINT8
TIMER0: TINT0
TIMER0: TINT1
TIMER1: TINT2
TIMER1: TINT3
PWM0
PWM1
PWM 1 Event
PWM2
PWM 2 Event
PWM3
PWM 3 Event
Reserved
3.15 MPEG4/JPEG Overview
The DM355 supports the computational operations used for image processing, JPEG compression and
MPEG4 video and imaging standard.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Detailed Device Description
91
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
4 Device Operating Conditions
4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Over Operating Case Temperature Range
(1)(2)
(Unless Otherwise Noted)
All 1.3 V supplies
-0.5 V to 1.7 V
-0.5 V to 2.5 V
-0.5 V to 1.89 V
-0.5 V to 4.4 V
-0.5 V to 2.3 V
-0.5 V to 3.8 V
0.0 V to 5.5 V
-20 mA to 20 mA
0°C to 85°C
All digital 1.8 V supplies
Supply voltage ranges
All analog 1.8 V supplies
All 3.3 V supplies
All 1.8 V I/Os
Input voltage ranges
All 3.3 V I/Os
VBUS
Clamp current for input or output(3)
Operating case temperature range
Storage temperature range
Iclamp
Commercial
M216EP
Tc
–55°C to 125°C
-65°C to 150 °C
Tstg
(1) Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
(2) All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
(3) Clamp current flows from an input or output pad to a supply rail through a clamp circuit or an intrinsic diode. Positive current results from
an applied input or output voltage that is more than 0.5 V higher (more positive) than the supply voltage,
VDD/VDDA_PLL1/2/VDD_USB/VDD_DDR for dual-supply macros. Negative current results from an applied voltage that is more than 0.5 V less
(more negative) than the VSS voltage..
92
Device Operating Conditions
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
4.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
MIN NOM
1.235
MAX UNIT
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
3.3
3.3
1.8
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.8
3.3
0
1.365
1.365
1.365
1.365
1.365
3.465
3.465
1.89
3.465
3.465
3.465
1.89
3.465
0
V
V
VDDA_PLL1
VDDA_PLL2
VDDD13_USB
VDDA13_USB
VDDA33_USB
Supply voltage, PLL1
1.235
1.235
1.235
1.235
3.135
3.135
1.71
3.135
3.135
3.135
1.71
3.135
0
Supply voltage, PLL2
V
Supply voltage, USB Digital
Supply voltage, USB Analog
Supply voltage, USB Analog
V
V
V
Supply Voltage
VDDA33_USB_PLL Supply voltage, USB Common PLL
VDD_DDR Supply voltage, DDR2 / MDDR
VDDA33_DDRDLL Supply voltage, DDR DLL Analog
V
V
V
VDD_VIN
VDD_VOUT
VDDA18_DAC
VDD
Supply voltage, Digital video In
Supply voltage, Digital Video Out
Supply voltage, DAC Analog
Supply voltage, I/Os
V
V
V
V
VSS
Supply ground, Core, USB Digital
Supply ground, PLL1
V
VSSA_PLL1
VSSA_PLL2
VSS_USB
VSSA_DLL
VSSA_DAC
VSS_MX1
VSS_MX2
0
0
0
V
Supply ground, PLL2
0
0
0
V
Supply ground, USB
0
0
0
V
Supply Ground
Supply ground, DLL
0
0
0
V
Supply ground, DAC Analog
MXI1 osc ground(1)
MXI2 osc ground(1)
0
0
0
V
0
0
0
V
0
0
0
V
Voltage Input High VIH
Voltage Input Low VIL
High-level input voltage(2)
Low-level input voltage(2)
DAC reference voltage
2
V
0.8
V
VREF
450
2550
499
0.1
mV
Ω
Ω
µF
RBIAS
RLOAD
CBG
DAC full-scale current adjust resistor
Output resistor
DAC(3)
Bypass capacitor
ROUT
RFB
Output resistor (ROUT), between TVOUT and VFB pins
Feedback resistor, between VFB and IOUT pins.
DAC full-scale current adjust resistor
Bypass capacitor
1070
1000
2550
0.1
Ω
Video Buffer(3)
RBIAS
CBG
Ω
µA
V
USB_VBUS
R1
USB external charge pump input
USB reference resistor(4)
4.85
9.9
0
5
5.25
10.1
85
USB
10
kΩ
Commercial
Operating case temperature range
M216EP
Temperature(5)
Tc
°C
–55
125
(1) Oscillator ground must be kept separate from other grounds and connected directly to the crystal load capacitor ground (see
Section 5.5.1).
(2) These I/O specifications apply to regular 3.3 V I/Os and do not apply to DDR2/mDDR, USB I/Os. DDR2/mDDR I/Os are 1.8 V I/Os and
adhere to JESD79-2A standard, USB I/Os adhere to USB2.0 spec.
(3) See Section 5.9.2.4. Also, resistors should be E-96 spec line (3 digits with 1% accuracy).
(4) Connect USB_R1 to VSS_USB_REF via 10K ohm, 1% resistor placed as close to the device as possible.
(5) To avoid frequency performance device degradation, limit the total device power on hours to less than 16500 hrs at Tc = 125°C.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Device Operating Conditions
93
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
4.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Ranges of Supply Voltage and Operating
Case Temperature (Unless Otherwise Noted)
(1)
PARAMETER
High-level output voltage(2)
TEST CONDITIONS
VDD=MIN, IOH=MAX
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
VOH
VOL
2.4
Voltage
Output
V
Low-level output voltage(2)
VDD=MIN, IOL=MAX
0.6
Input current for I/O without
internal pull-up/pull-down
II
VI = VSS to VDD
-1
40
1
Input current for I/O with
internal pull-up(3)(4)
II(pullup)
II(pulldown)
VI = VSS to VDD
VI = VSS to VDD
190
Input current for I/O with
internal pull-down(3)(4)
Current
Input/Output
-190
-40
µA
IOH
IOL
High-level output current
Low-level output current
-100
4000
VO = VDD or VSS; internal pull
disabled
IOZ
I/O off-state output current
±10
CI
Input capacitance
Output capacitance
Resolution
4
4
Capacitance
DAC
pF
CO
Resolution
10
1
Bits
RLOAD = 499 Ω, Video buffer
disabled
INL
Integral non-linearity, best fit
Differential non-linearity
LSB
RLOAD = 499 Ω, Video buffer
disabled
DNL
0.5
LSB
V
Compliance Output compliance range
IFS = 1.4 mA, RLOAD = 499 Ω
0
0.700
Output high voltage (top of
VOH(VIDBUF)
1.55
75% NTSC or PAL colorbar)(5)
Video Buffer
V
Output low voltage (bottom of
VOL(VIDBUF)
sync tip)
0.470
(1) For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
(2) These I/O specifications apply to regular 3.3 V I/Os and do not apply to DDR2/mDDR, USB I/Os. DDR2/mDDR I/Os are 1.8 V I/Os and
adhere to JESD79-2A standard, USB I/Os adhere to USB2.0 spec.
(3) This specification applies only to pins with an internal pullup (PU) or pulldown (PD). See Section 2.4 or Section 2.5 for pin descriptions.
(4) To pull up a signal to the opposite supply rail, a 1 kΩ resistor is recommended.
(5) 100% color bars are not supported. 100% color bars require 1.2 V peak-to-peak. The video buffer only provides 1.0 V peak-to-peak.
94
Device Operating Conditions
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5 DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
5.1 Parameter Information Device-Specific Information
Tester Pin Electronics
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
42 Ω
3.5 nH
Output
Under
Test
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 Ω
(see note)
Device Pin
(see note)
4.0 pF
1.85 pF
A. The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its
transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to
produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to
add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the
device pin.
Figure 5-1. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The load capacitance value stated is only for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This
load capacitance value does not indicate the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
5.1.1 Signal Transition Levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to Vref for both "0" and "1" logic levels. For 3.3 V I/O,
Vref = 1.65 V. For 1.8 V I/O, Vref = 0.9 V.
V
ref
Figure 5-2. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks,
VOLMAX and VOH MIN for output clocks.
V
ref
= V MIN (or V MIN)
IH OH
V
ref
= V MAX (or V MAX)
IL OL
Figure 5-3. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
5.1.2 Timing Parameters and Board Routing Analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a
good board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
95
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
adjusted by increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer
information specification (IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. To properly use IBIS
models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models for Timing
Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839). If needed, external logic hardware such as
buffers may be used to compensate any timing differences.
96
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.2 Recommended Clock and Control Signal Transition Behavior
All clocks and control signals should transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a
monotonic manner.
5.3 Power Supplies
The power supplies of DM355 are summarized in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1. Power Supplies
Customer Tolerance Package
Chip Plane
Name
Description
Comments
Board
Plane
Supply
1.3 V
±5%
±5%
1.3 V
CVDD
Core VDD
VDDA_PLL1
VDDA_PLL2
VDDD13_USB
VDDA13_USB
VDD
PLL1 VDDA
PLL2 VDDA
USB 1.3 V supply
USB 1.3 V supply
3.3 V
3.3 V
IO VDD for LVCMOS
IO VDD for MXI/O1
VDDSHV
VDDSHV
VDDSHV1
VDDSHV2
VDD
VDD
IO VDD for MXI/O2
VDD
IO VDD for ISB DRVVBUS
DDR DLL analog VDD
Analog 3.3 V power USB PHY
VDDA33_DDRDLL
VDDA33_USB
VDDA33_USB_PLL Common mode 3.3 V power for USB
PHY (PLL)
VDD
IO VDD for peripherals
IO VDD for VideoIN I/F
IO VDD for VideoOUT I/F
3.3 V
±5%
3.3 V
VDD_VIN
VDD_VOUT
VDD_DDR
VDDA18
1.8 V
1.8 V
1.8 V
±5%
±5%
±5%
1.8 V
1.8 V
1.8 V
Analog 1.8 V power
VDDA18_DAC
Place decoupling caps (0.1µF/10µf) close
to chip
0 V
0 V
0 V
n/a
n/a
n/a
0 V
0 V
0 V
VSS_MX1
VSS_MX2
VSS
Connect to external crystal capacitor
ground
Connect to external crystal capacitor
ground
Chip ground
USB ESD ground
ground
VSS
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
0 V
VSSA
ground
Keep separate from digital ground VSS
VSSA_PLL1
VSSA_PLL2
VSSA_DLL
VSS_USB
PLL1 VSSA
PLL2 VSSA
DLL ground
USB ground
VSSA13_USB
VSSA13_USB
VSSA33_USB
VSSA33_USB_PLL
0 V
0 V
n/a
n/a
0 V
0 V
VSS_USB_REF
VSSA_DAC
USB PHY reference ground
DAC ground
VSSREF
Keep separate from digital ground VSS
VDDS divided by 2, through board resistors
Connect to external charge pump
VDDS*0.5
5 V
VDDS*0.5 VREFSSTL
5 V USB_VBUS
DRR ref voltage
VBUS
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
97
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.3.1 Power-Supply Sequencing
In order to ensure device reliability, the DM355 requires the following power supply power-on and
power-off sequences. See table Table 5-1 for a description of DM355 power supplies.
Power-On:
1. Power on 1.3 V: CVDD, VDDA_PLL1/2, VDDD13_USB, VDDA13_USB
2. Power on 1.8 V: VDD_DDR, VDDA18_DAC
3. Power on 3.3 V: DVDD, VDDA33_DDRDLL, VDDA33_USB, VDDA33_USB_PLL, VDD_VIN, VDD_VOUT
You may power-on the 1.8 V and 3.3 V power supplies simultaneously.
Power-Off:
1. Power off 3.3 V: DVDD, VDDA33_DDRDLL, VDDA33_USB, VDDA33_USB_PLL, VDD_VIN, VDD_VOUT
2. Power off 1.8 V: VDD_DDR, VDDA18_DAC
3. Power off 1.3 V: CVDD, VDDA_PLL1/2, VDDD13_USB, VDDA13_USB
You may power-off the 1.8 V and 3.3 V power supplies simultaneously.
Power-off the 1.8v/3.3V supply before or within 10usec of power-off of the 1.3 V supply.
Note that when booting the DM355 from OneNAND, you must ensure that the OneNAND device is ready
with valid program instructions before the DM355 attempts to read program instructions from it. In
particular, before you release DM355 reset, you must allow time for OneNAND device power to stabilize
and for the OneNAND device to complete its internal copy routine. During the internal copy routine, the
OneNAND device copies boot code from its internal non-volatile memory to its internal boot memory
section. Board designers typically achieve this requirement by design of the system power and reset
supervisor circuit. Refer to your OneNAND device datasheet for OneNAND power ramp and stabilization
times and for OneNAND boot copy times.
5.3.1.1 Power-Supply Design Considerations
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DM355 to minimize inductance and
resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance applications
utilizing the DM355 device, the PC board should include separate power planes for core, I/O, and ground,
all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
5.3.1.2 Power-Supply Decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as
possible close to DM355. These caps need to be close to the DM355 power pins, no more than 1.25 cm
maximum distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better because of their
lower parasitic inductance. Proper capacitance values are also important. Small bypass caps (near 560
pF) should be closest to the power pins. Medium bypass caps (220 nF or as large as can be obtained in a
small package) should be next closest. TI recommends no less than 8 small and 8 medium caps per
supply be placed immediately next to the BGA vias, using the "interior" BGA space and at least the
corners of the "exterior".
Larger caps for each supply can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the order
of 100 µF) should be furthest away, but still as close as possible. Large caps for each supply should be
placed outside of the BGA footprint.
Any cap selection needs to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. As with the selection of
any component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production lifetime should be
considered. See also Section 5.5.1 and Section 5.5.2 for additional recommendations on power supplies
for the oscillator/PLL supplies.
98
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.4 Reset
5.4.1 Reset Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-2. Timing Requirements for Reset (1)(2) (see Figure 5-4)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
12C
12C
12C
MAX
1
2
3
tw(RESET)
tsu(BOOT)
th(BOOT)
Active low width of the RESET pulse
ns
ns
ns
Setup time, boot configuration pins valid before RESET rising edge
Hold time, boot configuration pins valid after RESET rising edge
(1) BTSEL[1:0] and AECFG[4:0] are the boot configuration pins during device reset.
(2) C = MXI/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI/CLKIN frequency is 24 MHz use C = 41.6 ns.
1
RESET
2
3
Boot Configuration Pins
(BTSEL[1:0], AECFG[3:0])
Figure 5-4. Reset Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
99
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.5 Oscillators and Clocks
DM355 has two oscillator input/output pairs (MXI1/MXO1 and MXI2/MXO2) usable with external crystals
or ceramic resonators to provide clock inputs. The optimal frequencies for the crystals are 24 MHz
(MXI1/MXO1) and 27 MHz (MXI2/MXO2). Optionally, the oscillator inputs are configurable for use with
external clock oscillators. If external clock oscillators are used, to minimize the clock jitter, a single clean
power supply should power both the DM355 and the external oscillator circuit and the minimum CLKIN
rise and fall times must be observed. The electrical requirements and characteristics are described in this
section.
The timing parameters for CLKOUT[3:1] are also described in this section. The DM355 has three output
clock pins (CLKOUT[3:1]). See Section 3.5 and Section 3.6 for more information on CLKOUT[3:1].
5.5.1 MXI1 (24-MHz) Oscillator
The MXI1 (typically 24 MHz, can also be 36 MHz) oscillator provides the primary reference clock for the
DM355 device. The on-chip oscillator requires an external crystal connected across the MXI1 and MXO1
pins, along with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-5. The external crystal load capacitors must be
connected only to the oscillator ground pin (VSS_MX1). Do not connect to board ground (VSS). Also, the PLL
power pin (VDDA_PLL1) should be connected to the power supply through a ferrite bead, L1 in the example
circuit shown in Figure 5-5.
MXO1
V
V
V
F
MXI1/CLKIN
SS_MX1
DDA_PLL1
SSA_PLL1
0.1
1
Crystal
24 MHz or
36 MHz
C1
C2
F
L1
Figure 5-5. MXI1 (24-MHz) Oscillator
The load capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied (typical values are
C1 = C2 ≥ 12 pF ≤ 24 pF). CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete
components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the
associated oscillator pins (MXI1 and MXO1) and to the VSS_MX1 pin. Cshunt is the shunt (stray) capacitance
of the crystal plus the parasitic capacitance between MXI and MXO pins on the board and package.
C1C2
CL
+ Cshunt
(C1 C2)
100
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-3. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for 24-MHz System
Oscillator
PARAMETER
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency)
Oscillation frequency
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
ms
4
24 or 36
MHz
24 MHz
60
30
ESR
Ω
36 MHz
Frequency stability
±50
ppm
5.5.2 MXI2 (27-MHz) Oscillator (optional oscillator)
The MXI2 (27 MHz) oscillator provides an optional reference clock for the DM355's VPSS module. The
on-chip oscillator requires an external 27-MHz crystal connected across the MXI2 and MXO2 pins, along
with two load capacitors, as shown in Figure 5-6. The external crystal load capacitors must be connected
only to the 27-MHz oscillator ground pin (VSS_MX2). Do not connect to board ground (VSS). Also, the PLL
power pin (VDDA_PLL2) should be connected to the power supply through a ferrite bead, L1 in the example
circuit shown in Figure 5-6.
MXO2
V
V
V
SSA_PLL2
MXI2
SS_MX2
DDA_PLL2
Crystal
27 MHz
0.1
1
F
C1
C2
F
L1
Figure 5-6. MXI2 (27-MHz) System Oscillator
The load capacitors, C1 and C2, should be chosen such that the equation is satisfied (typical values are
C1 = C2 = 10 pF). CL in the equation is the load specified by the crystal manufacturer. All discrete
components used to implement the oscillator circuit should be placed as close as possible to the
associated oscillator pins (MXI and MXO) and to the VSS_MX2 pin. Cshunt is the shunt (stray) capacitance of
the crystal plus the parasitic capacitance between MXI and MXO pins on the board and package.
C1C2
CL
+ Cshunt
(C1 C2)
Table 5-4. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for 27-MHz System
Oscillator
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
ms
Start-up time (from power up until oscillating at stable frequency)
4
Oscillation frequency
ESR
27
MHz
Ω
50
Frequency stability
±50
ppm
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
101
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.5.3 Clock PLL Electrical Data/Timing (Input and Output Clocks)
Table 5-5. Timing Requirements for MXI1/CLKIN1(1)(2) (see Figure 5-7)
DM355
TYP
NO
.
UNIT
MIN
27.7(3)
0.45C
0.45C
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
tc(MXI1)
tw(MXI1H)
tw(MXI1L)
tt(MXI1)
Cycle time, MXI1/CLKIN1
41.6(3) ns
0.55C ns
0.55C ns
0.05C ns
0.02C ns
Pulse duration, MXI1/CLKIN1 high
Pulse duration, MXI1/CLKIN1 low
Transition time, MXI1/CLKIN1
Period jitter, MXI1/CLKIN1
tJ(MXI1)
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
(2) C = MXI1/CLKIN1 cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI1/CLKIN1 frequency is 24 MHz use C = 41.6 ns.
(3) tc(MXI1) = 41.6 ns and tc(MXI1) = 27.7 ns are the only supported cycle times for MXI1/CLKIN1.
1
5
4
2
MXI/CLKIN
3
4
Figure 5-7. MXI1/CLKIN1 Timing
Table 5-6. Timing Requirements for MXI2/CLKIN2(1)(2) (see Figure 5-7)
NO.
DM355
UNIT
MIN
37.037(3)
0.45C
TYP
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
tc(MXI2)
tw(MXI2H)
tw(MXI2L)
tt(MXI2)
Cycle time, MXI2/CLKIN2
37.037(3) ns
0.55C ns
0.55C ns
0.05C ns
0.02C ns
Pulse duration, MXI2/CLKIN2 high
Pulse duration, MXI2/CLKIN2 low
Transition time, MXI2/CLKIN2
Period jitter, MXI2/CLKIN2
0.45C
tJ(MXI2)
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
(2) C = MXI2/CLKIN2 cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI2/CLKIN2 frequency is 27 MHz use C = 37.037 ns.
(3) tc(MXI2) = 37.037 ns is the only supported cycle time for MXI2/CLKIN2.
1
5
4
2
MXI/CLKIN
3
4
Figure 5-8. MXI2/CLKIN2 Timing
102
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-7. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT1(1)(2) (see
Figure 5-9)
DM355
TYP
UNI
T
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
1
2
3
4
tC(CLKOUT1)
tw(CLKOUT1H)
tw(CLKOUT1L)
tt(CLKOUT1)
Cycle time, CLKOUT1
tc(MXI1)
0.45P
0.45P
ns
ns
ns
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT1 high
Pulse duration, CLKOUT1 low
Transition time, CLKOUT1
0.55P
0.55P
0.05P
td(MXI1H-
CLKOUT1H)
td(MXI1L-
5
6
Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1 high to CLKOUT1 high
Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1I low to CLKOUT1 low
1
1
8
8
ns
ns
CLKOUT1L)
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOHMIN.
(2) P = 1/CLKOUT1 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUT1 frequency is 24 MHz use P = 41.6 ns.
5
6
MXI/CLKIN
2
4
1
CLKOUT1
3
4
Figure 5-9. CLKOUT1 Timing
Table 5-8. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT2(1)(2) (see
Figure 5-10)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
tc(MXI1) /3
0.45P
TYP
MAX
1
2
3
4
tC(CLKOUT2)
Cycle time, CLKOUT2
tw(CLKOUT2H) Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 high
tw(CLKOUT2L) Pulse duration, CLKOUT2 low
0.55P
0.55P
0.05P
ns
ns
ns
0.45P
tt(CLKOUT2)
Transition time, CLKOUT2
td(MXI1H-
CLKOUT2H)
td(MXI1L-
5
6
Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1 high to CLKOUT2 high
1
1
8
8
ns
ns
Delay time, MXI1/CLKIN1 low to CLKOUT2 low
CLKOUT2L)
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOHMIN.
(2) P = 1/CLKOUT2 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUT2 frequency is 8 MHz use P = 125 ns.
MXI/CLKIN
5
6
2
4
1
CLKOUT2
3
4
Figure 5-10. CLKOUT2 Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
103
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 5-9. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for CLKOUT3(1)(2) (see
Figure 5-11)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
tc(MXI1) /8
0.45P
TYP
MAX
1
2
3
4
tC(CLKOUT3)
tw(CLKOUT3H)
tw(CLKOUT3L)
tt(CLKOUT3)
Cycle time, CLKOUT3
Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 high
Pulse duration, CLKOUT3 low
Transition time, CLKOUT3
0.55P
0.55P
0.05P
ns
ns
ns
0.45P
td(MXI2H-
CLKOUT3H)
td(MXI2L-
5
6
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI high to CLKOUT3 high
Delay time, CLKIN/MXI low to CLKOUT3 low
1
1
8
8
ns
ns
CLKOUT3L)
(1) The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOHMIN.
(2) P = 1/CLKOUT3 clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns). For example, when CLKOUT3 frequency is 3 MHz use P = 333.3 ns.
MXI/CLKIN
1
5
6
4
CLKOUT3
2
3
4
Figure 5-11. CLKOUT3 Timing
104
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.6 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
The GPIO peripheral provides general-purpose pins that can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
When configured as an output, a write to an internal register can control the state driven on the output pin.
When configured as an input, the state of the input is detectable by reading the state of an internal
register. In addition, the GPIO peripheral can produce CPU interrupts and EDMA events in different
interrupt/event generation modes. The GPIO peripheral provides generic connections to external devices.
The GPIO pins are grouped into banks of 16 pins per bank (i.e., bank 0 consists of GPIO [0:15]). There
are a total of 7 GPIO banks in the DM355, because the DM355 has 104 GPIOs.
The DM355 GPIO peripheral supports the following:
•
•
Up to 104 3.3v GPIO pins, GPIO[103:0]
Interrupts:
–
–
–
Up to 10 unique GPIO[9:0] interrupts from Bank 0
Up to 7 GPIO (bank aggregated) interrupt signals, one from each of the 7 banks of GPIOs
Interrupts can be triggered by rising and/or falling edge, specified for each interrupt capable GPIO
signal
•
•
DMA events:
–
–
Up to 10 unique GPIO DMA events from Bank 0
Up to 7 GPIO (bank aggregated) DMA event signals, one from each of the 7 banks of GPIOs
Set/clear functionality: Firmware writes 1 to corresponding bit position(s) to set or to clear GPIO
signal(s). This allows multiple firmware processes to toggle GPIO output signals without critical section
protection (disable interrupts, program GPIO, re-enable interrupts, to prevent context switching to
anther process during GPIO programming).
•
•
Separate Input/Output registers
Output register in addition to set/clear so that, if preferred by firmware, some GPIO output signals can
be toggled by direct write to the output register(s).
•
Output register, when read, reflects output drive status. This, in addition to the input register reflecting
pin status and open-drain I/O cell, allows wired logic be implemented.
5.6.1 GPIO Peripheral Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-10. Timing Requirements for GPIO Inputs (see Figure 5-12)
DM355
MIN MAX
NO.
UNIT
1
2
tw(GPIH)
tw(GPIL)
Pulse duration, GPIx high
Pulse duration, GPIx low
52
52
ns
ns
Table 5-11. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs
(see Figure 5-12)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
26(1)
26(1)
MAX
3
4
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
Pulse duration, GPOx high
Pulse duration, GPOx low
ns
ns
(1) This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the
GPIO is dependent upon internal bus activity.
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
105
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 5-12. GPIO Port Timing
5.6.2 GPIO Peripheral External Interrupts Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-12. Timing Requirements for External Interrupts/EDMA Events(1) (see Figure 5-13)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
52
MAX
1
2
tw(ILOW)
tw(IHIGH)
Width of the external interrupt pulse low
Width of the external interrupt pulse high
ns
ns
52
(1) The pulse width given is sufficient to generate an interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have DM355 to recognize the
GPIO changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIO duration must be extended to allow DM355 enough time to
access the GPIO register through the internal bus.
2
1
EXT_INTx
Figure 5-13. GPIO External Interrupt Timing
106
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.7 External Memory Interface (EMIF)
DM355 supports several memory and external device interfaces, including:
•
Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF) for interfacing to SRAM.
–
–
OneNAND flash memories
NAND flash memories
•
DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller for interfacing to SDRAM.
5.7.1 Asynchronous EMIF (AEMIF)
The EMIF supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
SRAM, etc. on up to 2 asynchronous chip selects addressable up to 64KB each
Supports 8-bit or 16-bit data bus widths
Programmable asynchronous cycle timings
Supports extended wait mode
Supports Select Strobe mode
5.7.1.1 NAND (NAND, SmartMedia, xD)
The NAND features of the EMIF are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
NAND flash on up to 2 asynchronous chip selects
8 and 16-bit data bus widths
Programmable cycle timings
Performs 1-bit and 4-bit ECC calculation
NAND Mode also supports SmartMedia/SSFDC (Solid State Floppy Disk Controller) and xD memory
cards
5.7.1.2 OneNAND
The OneNAND features supported are as follows.
•
•
•
•
NAND flash on up to 2 asynchronous chip selects
Only 16-bit data bus widths
Supports asynchronous writes and reads
Supports synchronous reads with continuous linear burst mode (Does not support synchronous reads
with wrap burst modes)
•
Programmable cycle timings for each chip select in asynchronous mode
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
107
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.7.1.3 AEMIF Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-13. Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module(1) (see Figure 5-14
and Figure 5-15)
DM355
Nom
NO
.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
READS and WRITES
Pulse duration, EM_WAIT assertion and
deassertion
2
tw(EM_WAIT)
2E
ns
READS
12 tsu(EMDV-EMOEH) Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_OE high
5
0
ns
ns
13 th(EMOEH-EMDIV)
Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_OE high
tsu(EMOEL-
EMWAIT)
Setup time EM_WAIT asserted before EM_OE
high(2)
14
4E
ns
READS (OneNAND Synchronous Burst Read)
Setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid before EM_CLK
high
30 tsu(EMDV-EMCLKH)
4
4
ns
ns
31 th(EMCLKH-EMDIV) Hold time, EM_D[15:0] valid after EM_CLK high
WRITES
Setup time, EM_WAIT asserted before EM_WE
high(2)
tsu(EMWEL-
28
4E
ns
EMWAIT)
(1) E = PLLC1 SYSCLK2 period in ns. SYSCLK2 is the EMIF peripheral clock. SYSCLK2 is one-fourth the PLLC output clock. For example,
when PLLC output clock = 432 MHz, E = 9.259 ns. See Section 3.5 for more information.
(2) Setup before end of STROBE phase (if no extended wait states are inserted) by which EM_WAIT must be asserted to add extended
wait states. Figure 5-16 and Figure 5-17 describe EMIF transactions that include extended wait states inserted during the STROBE
phase. However, cycles inserted as part of this extended wait period should not be counted; the 4E requirement is to the start of where
the HOLD phase would begin if there were no extended wait cycles.
Table 5-14. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module(1)(2)(3) (see Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15)
DM355
UNI
T
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
Nom
MAX
READS and WRITES
READS
1
td(TURNAROUND)
Turn around time
(TA)*E
ns
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 0)
EMIF read cycle time (EW = 1)
(RS+RST+RH)*E
ns
ns
3
4
tc(EMRCYCLE)
(RS+RST+RH+(EWC*
16))*E
Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to
EM_OE low (SS = 0)
(RS)*E
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tsu(EMCEL-EMOEL)
Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to
EM_OE low (SS = 1)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to
EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 0)
(RH)*E
0
5
6
th(EMOEH-EMCEH)
Output hold time, EM_OE high to
EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 1)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to
EM_OE low
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
(RS)*E
(1) TA = Turn around, RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold,
MEWC = Maximum external wait cycles. These parameters are programmed via the Asynchronous Bank and Asynchronous Wait Cycle
Configuration Registers. These support the following range of values: TA[4-1], RS[16-1], RST[64-1], RH[8-1], WS[16-1], WST[64-1],
WH[8-1], and MEW[1-256].
(2) E = PLLC1 SYSCLK2 period in ns. SYSCLK2 is the EMIF peripheral clock. SYSCLK2 is one-fourth the PLLC output clock. For example,
when PLLC output clock = 432 MHz, E = 9.259 ns. See Section 3.5 for more information
(3) EWC = external wait cycles determined by EM_WAIT input signal. EWC supports the following range of values EWC[256-1]. Note that
the maximum wait time before timeout is specified by bit field MEWC in the Asynchronous Wait Cycle Configuration Register.
108
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-14. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Asynchronous
Memory Cycles for AEMIF Module (see Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15) (continued)
DM355
UNI
T
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
Nom
MAX
Output hold time, EM_OE high to
EM_BA[1:0] invalid
7
8
9
th(EMOEH-EMBAIV)
tsu(EMBAV-EMOEL)
th(EMOEH-EMAIV)
(RH)*E
ns
ns
ns
Output setup time, EM_A[13:0] valid to
EM_OE low
(RS)*E
(RH)*E
Output hold time, EM_OE high to
EM_A[13:0] invalid
EM_OE active low width (EW = 0)
EM_OE active low width (EW = 1)
(RST)*E
ns
ns
10 tw(EMOEL)
(RST+(EWC*16))*E
td(EMWAITH-
EMOEH)
Delay time from EM_WAIT deasserted to
EM_OE high
11
4E
ns
READS (OneNAND Synchronous Burst Read)
MH
z
32 fc(EM_CLK)
Frequency, EM_CLK
Cycle time, EM_CLK
1
66
33 tc(EM_CLK)
tsu(EM_ADVV-
15
1000 ns
Output setup time, EM_ADV valid before
EM_CLK high
34
35
36
37
5
6
5
6
ns
EM_CLKH)
th(EM_CLKH-
EM_ADVIV)
Output hold time, EM_CLK high to EM_ADV
invalid
ns
ns
ns
tsu(EM_AV-
EM_CLKH)
Output setup time, EM_A[13:0]/EM_BA[1]
valid before EM_CLK high
th(EM_CLKH-
EM_AIV)
Output hold time, EM_CLK high to
EM_A[13:0]/EM_BA[1] invalid
38 tw(EM_CLKH)
Pulse duration, EM_CLK high
Pulse duration, EM_CLK low
tc(EM_CLK)/3
tc(EM_CLK)/3
ns
ns
39 tw(EM_CLKL)
WRITES
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 0)
EMIF write cycle time (EW = 1)
(WS+WST+WH)*E
ns
ns
15 tc(EMWCYCLE)
(WS+WST+WH+(EW
C*16))*E
Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to
EM_WE low (SS = 0)
(WS)*E
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
16 tsu(EMCEL-EMWEL)
Output setup time, EM_CE[1:0] low to
EM_WE low (SS = 1)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to
EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 0)
(WH)*E
0
17 th(EMWEH-EMCEH)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to
EM_CE[1:0] high (SS = 1)
Output setup time, EM_BA[1:0] valid to
EM_WE low
20 tsu(EMBAV-EMWEL)
21 th(EMWEH-EMBAIV)
22 tsu(EMAV-EMWEL)
23 th(EMWEH-EMAIV)
(WS)*E
(WH)*E
(WS)*E
(WH)*E
Output hold time, EM_WE high to
EM_BA[1:0] invalid
Output setup time, EM_A[13:0] valid to
EM_WE low
Output hold time, EM_WE high to
EM_A[13:0] invalid
EM_WE active low width (EW = 0)
EM_WE active low width (EW = 1)
(WST)*E
ns
ns
24 tw(EMWEL)
(WST+(EWC*16))*E
td(EMWAITH-
EMWEH)
Delay time from EM_WAIT deasserted to
EM_WE high
25
4E
(WS)*E
(WH)*E
ns
ns
ns
Output setup time, EM_D[15:0] valid to
EM_WE low
26 tsu(EMDV-EMWEL)
Output hold time, EM_WE high to
EM_D[15:0] invalid
27 th(EMWEH-EMDIV)
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
109
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
3
1
EM_CE[1:0]
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[13:0]
4
8
5
9
7
6
10
EM_OE
13
12
EM_D[15:0]
EM_WE
Figure 5-14. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIF
15
1
EM_CE[1:0]
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[13:0]
16
18
20
22
17
19
21
23
24
EM_WE
27
26
EM_D[15:0]
EM_OE
Figure 5-15. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIF
110
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
SETUP
STROBE
Extended Due to EM_WAIT
STROBE HOLD
EM_CE[1:0]
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[13:0]
EM_D[15:0]
14
11
EM_OE
2
2
EM_WAIT
Asserted
Deasserted
Figure 5-16. EM_WAIT Read Timing Requirements
SETUP
STROBE
Extended Due to EM_WAIT
STROBE HOLD
EM_CE[1:0]
EM_BA[1:0]
EM_A[13:0]
EM_D[15:0]
28
25
EM_WE
2
2
Asserted
Deasserted
EM_WAIT
Figure 5-17. EM_WAIT Write Timing Requirements
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
111
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
33
38
EM_CE[1:0]
39
EM_CLK
EM_ADV
34
35
31
36
EM_BA0,
EM_A[13:0],
EM_BA1
30
Da
37
Da+n+1
Da+n
EM_D[15:0]
EM_OE
Da+1
Da+2
Da+3
Da+4
Da+5
EM_WAIT
Figure 5-18. Synchronous OneNAND Flash Read Timing
112
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.7.2 DDR2/mDDR Memory Controller
The DDR2 / mDDR Memory Controller is a dedicated interface to DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM. It supports
JESD79D-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM devices and compliant Mobile DDR SDRAM devices.
DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM plays a key role in a DM355-based system. Such a system is expected to require
a significant amount of high-speed external memory for all of the following functions:
•
•
•
•
Buffering of input image data from sensors or video sources
Intermediate buffering for processing/resizing of image data in the VPFE
Numerous OSD display buffers
Intermediate buffering for large raw Bayer data image files while performing image processing
functions
•
•
Buffering for intermediate data while performing video encode and decode functions
Storage of executable code for the ARM
The DDR2 / mDDR Memory Controller supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
JESD79D-2A standard compliant DDR2 SDRAM
Mobile DDR SDRAM
256 MByte memory space
Data bus width 16 bits
CAS latencies:
–
–
DDR2: 2, 3, 4, and 5
mDDR: 2 and 3
•
Internal banks:
–
–
DDR2: 1, 2, 4, and 8
mDDR: 1, 2, and 4
•
•
Burst length: 8
Burst type: sequential
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 CS signal
Page sizes: 256, 512, 1024, and 2048
SDRAM autoinitialization
Self-refresh mode
Partial array self-refresh (for mDDR)
Power down mode
Prioritized refresh
Programmable refresh rate and backlog counter
Programmable timing parameters
Little endian
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
113
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.8 MMC/SD
The DM355 includes two separate MMC/SD Controllers which are compliant with MMC V3.31, Secure
Digital Part 1 Physical Layer Specification V1.1 and Secure Digital Input Output (SDIO) V1.0
specifications.
The DM355 MMC/SD Controller has following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MultiMediaCard (MMC).
Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card.
MMC/SD protocol support.
SDIO protocol support.
Programmable clock frequency.
256 bit Read/Write FIFO to lower system overhead.
Slave EDMA transfer capability.
The DM355 MMC/SD Controller does not support SPI mode.
5.8.1 MMC/SD Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-15. Timing Requirements for MMC/SD Module
(see Figure 5-20 and Figure 5-22)
DM355
FAST MODE STANDARD MODE UNIT
NO.
MIN
6
2.5(1)
MAX
MIN
5
MAX
1
2
3
4
tsu(CMDV-CLKH) Setup time, SD_CMD valid before SD_CLK high
ns
ns
ns
ns
th(CLKH-CMDV)
tsu(DATV-CLKH)
th(CLKH-DATV)
Hold time, SD_CMD valid after SD_CLK high
Setup time, SD_DATx valid before SD_CLK high
Hold time, SD_DATx valid after SD_CLK high
5
6
5
2.5
5
(1) For this parameter, you may include margin in your board design so that the toh = 2.5 ns of the MMC/SD device is not degraded at the
DM355 input pin.
Table 5-16. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for MMC/SD Module
(see Figure 5-19 through Figure 5-22)
DM355
STANDARD
NO.
PARAMETER
FAST MODE
UNIT
MODE
MIN
0
MIN
0
MAX
MAX
7
8
9
f(CLK)
Operating frequency, SD_CLK
50
25 MHz
400 KHz
ns
f(CLK_ID)
tW(CLKL)
Identification mode frequency, SD_CLK
Pulse width, SD_CLK low
Pulse width, SD_CLK high
Rise time, SD_CLK
0
400
0
7
10
10 tW(CLKH)
11 tr(CLK)
12 tf(CLK)
7
10
ns
3
3
10 ns
10 ns
Fall time, SD_CLK
td(CLKL-
CMD)
13
Delay time, SD_CLK low to SD_CMD transition
-7.5
-7.5
4
4
-7.5
-7.5
14 ns
14 ns
14 td(CLKL-DAT) Delay time, SD_CLK low to SD_DATx transition
114
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
10
9
7
SD_CLK
SD_CMD
13
13
13
Valid
13
START
XMIT
Valid
Valid
END
Figure 5-19. MMC/SD Host Command Timing
9
10
7
SD_CLK
SD_CMD
1
2
Valid
START
XMIT
Valid
Valid
END
Figure 5-20. MMC/SD Card Response Timing
10
9
7
SD_CLK
14
14
14
Dx
14
START
D0
D1
END
SD_DATx
Figure 5-21. MMC/SD Host Write Timing
9
10
7
SD_CLK
4
4
3
3
Start
SD_DATx
D0
D1
Dx
End
Figure 5-22. MMC/SD Host Read and Card CRC Status Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
115
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.9 Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) Overview
The DM355 contains a Video Processing Sub-System (VPSS) that provides an input interface (Video
Processing Front End or VPFE) for external imaging peripherals such as image sensors, video decoders,
etc.; and an output interface (Video Processing Back End or VPBE) for display devices, such as analog
SDTV displays, digital LCD panels, HDTV video encoders, etc.
In addition to these peripherals, there is a set of common buffer memory and DMA control to ensure
efficient use of the DDR2 burst bandwidth. The shared buffer logic/memory is a unique block that is
tailored for seamlessly integrating the VPSS into an image/video processing system. It acts as the primary
source or sink to all the VPFE and VPBE modules that are either requesting or transferring data from/to
DDR2. In order to efficiently utilize the external DDR2 bandwidth, the shared buffer logic/memory
interfaces with the DMA system via a high bandwidth bus (64-bit wide). The shared buffer logic/memory
also interfaces with all the VPFE and VPBE modules via a 128-bit wide bus. The shared buffer
logic/memory (divided into the read & write buffers and arbitration logic) is capable of performing the
following functions. It is imperative that the VPSS utilize DDR2 bandwidth efficiently due to both its large
bandwidth requirements and the real-time requirements of the VPSS modules. Because it is possible to
configure the VPSS modules in such a way that DDR2 bandwidth is exceeded, a set of user accessible
registers is provided to monitor overflows or failures in data transfers.
5.9.1 Video Processing Front-End (VPFE)
The VPFE or Video Processing Front-End block is comprised of the CCD Controller (CCDC), Image Pipe
(IPIPE), and Hardware 3A Statistic Generator (H3A). These modules are described in the sections that
follow.
5.9.1.1 CCD Controller (CCDC)
The CCDC is responsible for accepting raw (unprocessed) image/video data from a sensor (CMOS or
CCD). In addition, the CCDC can accept YUV video data in numerous formats, typically from so-called
video decoder devices. In the case of raw inputs, the CCDC output requires additional image processing
to transform the raw input image to the final processed image. This processing can be done either
on-the-fly in the Preview Engine hardware ISP or in software on the ARM and MPEG4/JPEG coprocessor
subsystems. In parallel, raw data input to the CCDC can also used for computing various statistics (3A,
Histogram) to eventually control the image/video tuning parameters. The CCDC is programmed via control
and parameter registers. DM355 performance is enhanced by its dedicated hard-wired MPEG4/JPEG
coprocessor (MJCP). The MJCP performs all the computational operations required for JPEG and MPEG4
compression. These operations can be invoked using the xDM (xDIAS for Digital Media) APIs. For more
information, refer to the xDIAS-DM (xDIAS for Digital Media) User's Guide (literature number SPRUEC8).
The following features are supported by the CCDC module.
•
•
Support for conventional Bayer pattern.
Generates HD/VD timing signals and field ID to an external timing generator or can synchronize to the
external timing generator.
•
•
Support for progressive and interlaced sensors (hardware support for up to 2 fields and firmware
support for higher number of fields, typically 3-, 4-, and 5-field sensors).
Support for up to 75-MHZ sensor pixel clock if H3A is not used, otherwise the pixel clock must be less
than 67.5 MHZ
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for ITU-R BT.656 standard format, either 8-bit or 16-bit.
Support for YCbCr 422 format, either 8- or 16-bit with discrete HSYNC and VSYNC signals.
Support for up to 14-bit input.
Support for color space conversion
Generates optical black clamping signals.
Support for shutter signal control.
Support for digital clamping and black level compensation.
Fault pixel correction based on a lookup table that contains row and column position of the pixel to be
116
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
corrected.
•
•
•
Support for program lens shading correction.
Support for 10-bit to 8-bit A-law compression.
Support for a low-pass filter prior to writing to SDRAM. If this filter is enabled, 2 pixels each in the left
and right edges of each line are cropped from the output.
•
Support for generating output to range from 14-bits to 8-bits wide (8-bits wide allows for 50% saving in
storage area).
•
•
•
Support for down sampling via programmable culling patterns.
Ability to control output to the DDR2 via an external write enable signal.
Support for up to 32K pixels (image size) in both the horizontal and vertical direction.
5.9.1.2 IPIPE - Image Pipe
The hardware Image Pipe (IPIPE) is a programmable hardware image processing module that is
responsible for transforming raw (unprocessed) image/video data from a sensor (CMOS or CCD) into
YCbCr 422 data that is amenable for compression or display. The IPIPE can also be configured to operate
in a resize only mode, which allows YCbCr 422 to be resized without applying the processing of every
module in the IPIPE. Typically, the output of the IPIPE is used for both video compression and displaying
it on an external display device such as a NTSC/PAL analog encoder or a digital LCD. The IPIPE is
programmed via control and parameter registers. The following features are supported by the IPIPE.
•
The input interface extracts valid raw data from the CCD raw data, and then various modules in IPIPE
process the raw CCD data.
•
The 2D noise filter module reduces impulse noise in the raw data and adjusts the resolution of the
input image.
•
•
The 2D pre-filter adjusts the resolution of the input image and remove line crawl noise.
The white balance module applies two gain adjustments to the data: a digital gain (total gain) and a
white balance gain.
•
•
•
The Color Filter Array (CFA) interpolation module implements CFA interpolation. The output from the
CFA interpolation module is always RGB formatted data.
The RGB2RGB blending module applies a 3x3 matrix transform to the RGB data generated by the
CFA interpolation module.
The gamma correction module independently applies gamma correction to each RGB component.
Gamma is implemented using a piece-wise linear interpolation approach with a 512 entry look up table
for each color.
•
•
•
•
•
The RGB2YCbCr conversion module applies 3x3 matrix transformation to the RGB data to convert it to
YCbCr data. This module also implements offset.
The 4:2:2 conversion module applies the chroma low pass filter and down samples Cb and Cr, so that
IPIPE output data is in YCbCr-4:2:2 format.
The 2D edge enhancer module improves image clarity with luminance non-linear filter. This module
also has contrast and brightness adjustment functions.
The chroma suppression module reduces faulty-color using luminance (Y) value or high-pass-filtering Y
value. The H-resizer and V-resizer modules resize horizontal and vertical image sizes, respectively.
The output interface module transfers data from IPIPE to SDRAM, in the form of YCbCr-422 or RGB
(32bit/16bit).
•
•
The histogram function can record histograms of up to 4 distinct areas into up to 256 bins.
IPIPE has three different processing paths:
–
–
Case 1: The CCD raw data directly leads to IPIPE and stores the YCbCr (or RGB) data to SDRAM.
Case 2: IPIPE reads CCD raw data and stores the Bayer pattern data after white balance to
SDRAM.
–
Case 3: IPIPE reads YCbCr-422 data and apply edge enhance, chroma suppression and Resize to
output YCbCr (or RGB) data to SDRAM.
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
117
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.9.1.3 Hardware 3A (H3A)
The H3A module is designed to support the control loops for Auto Focus, Auto White Balance and Auto
Exposure by collecting metrics about the imaging/video data. The metrics are to adjust the various
parameters for processing the imaging/video data. There are 2 main blocks in the H3A module:
•
•
Auto Focus (AF) engine
Auto Exposure (AE) Auto White Balance (AWB) engine
The AF engine extracts and filters the red, green, and blue data from the input image/video data and
provides either the accumulation or peaks of the data in a specified region. The specified region is a
two-dimensional block of data and is referred to as a "paxel" for the case of AF.
The AE/AWB Engine accumulates the values and checks for saturated values in a sub sampling of the
video data. In the case of the AE/AWB, the two-dimensional block of data is referred to as a "window".
Thus, other than referring them by different names, a paxel and a window are essentially the same thing.
However, the number, dimensions, and starting position of the AF paxels and the AE/AWB windows are
separately programmable.
The following features are supported by the AF engine:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for input from DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM (in addition to the CCDC port)
Support for a Peak Mode in a Paxel (a Paxel is defined as a two dimensional block of pixels).
Accumulate the maximum Focus Value of each line in a Paxel
Support for an Accumulation/Sum Mode (instead of Peak mode).
Accumulate Focus Value in a Paxel.
Support for up to 36 Paxels in the horizontal direction and up to 128 Paxels in the vertical direction.
The number of horizontal paxels is limited by the memory size (and cost), while the vertical number of
paxels is not. Therefore, the number of paxels in horizontal direction is smaller than the number of
paxels in vertical direction.
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable width and height for the Paxel. All paxels in the frame will be of same size.
Programmable red, green, and blue position within a 2x2 matrix.
Separate horizontal start for paxel and filtering.
Programmable vertical line increments within a paxel.
Parallel IIR filters configured in a dual-biquad configuration with individual coefficients (2 filters with 11
coefficients each). The filters are intended to compute the sharpness/peaks in the frame to focus on.
The following features are supported by the AE/AWB engine:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for input from DDR2 / mDDR SDRAM (in addition to the CCDC port)
Accumulate clipped pixels along with all non-saturated pixels
Support for up to 36 horizontal windows.
Support for up to 128 vertical windows.
Programmable width and height for the windows. All windows in the frame will be of same size.
Separate vertical start co-ordinate and height for a black row of paxels that is different than the
remaining color paxels.
•
•
Programmable Horizontal Sampling Points in a window
Programmable Vertical Sampling Points in a window
118
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.9.1.4 VPFE Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-17. Timing Requirements for VPFE PCLK Master/Slave Mode(1) (see Figure 5-23)
NO.
MIN
13.33 or P(2)
2P + 1
MAX UNIT
H3A not used
H3A used
100
100
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
1
tc(PCLK)
Cycle time, PCLK
2
3
4
tw(PCLKH)
tw(PCLKL)
tt(PCLK)
Pulse duration, PCLK high
Pulse duration, PCLK low
Transition time, PCLK
5.7
5.7
3
(1) P = 1/SYSCLK4 in nanoseconds (ns). For example, if the SYSCLK4 frequency is 135 MHz, use P = 7.41 ns. See Section 3.5, Device
Clocking, for more information on the supported clock configurations of the DM355.
(2) Use whichever value is greater.
2
3
1
PCLK
4
4
Figure 5-23. VPFE PCLK Timing
Table 5-18. Timing Requirements for VPFE (CCD) Slave Mode (see Figure 5-24)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
3
MAX
5
6
tsu(CCDV-PCLK)
th(PCLK-CCDV)
tsu(HDV-PCLK)
th(PCLK-HDV)
tsu(VDV-PCLK)
th(PCLK-VDV)
Setup time, CCD valid before PCLK edge
Hold time, CCD valid after PCLK edge
Setup time, HD valid before PCLK edge
Hold time, HD valid after PCLK edge
Setup time, VD valid before PCLK edge
Hold time, VD valid after PCLK edge
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
2
7
3
8
2
9
3
10
2
tsu(CAM_WEN_FIELD
V-PCLK)
11
12
Setup time, CAM_WEN_FIELD valid before PCLK edge
Hold time, C_WEN_FIELD valid after PCLK edge
3
2
ns
ns
th(CAM_WEN_FIELDV
-PCLK)
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
119
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
8, 10
7, 9
HD/VD
11
12
CAM_WEN_FIELD
5
6
CI[7:0]/YI[7:0]/
CCD[13:0]
Figure 5-24. VPFE (CCD) Slave Mode Input Data Timing
Table 5-19. Timing Requirements for VPFE (CCD) Master Mode(1) (see Figure 5-25)
DM355
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
15
16
tsu(CCDV-PCLK)
th(PCLK-CCDV)
tsu(CAM_WEN_FIELD
Setup time, CCD valid before PCLK edge
Hold time, CCD valid after PCLK edge
3
2
ns
ns
23
24
Setup time, CAM_WEN_FIELD valid before PCLK edge
Hold time, CAM_WEN_FIELD valid after PCLK edge
3
2
ns
ns
V-PCLK)
th(PCLK-
CAM_WEN_FIELDV)
(1) The VPFE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode the
rising edge of PCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode the falling edge of PCLK is referenced.
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
15
16
CI[7:0]/YI[7:0]/
CCD[13:0]
23
24
CAM_WEN_FIELD
Figure 5-25. VPFE (CCD) Master Mode Input Data Timing
120
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-20. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPFE (CCD) Master
Mode (see Figure 5-26)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
3
MAX
11
18
20
td(PCLKL-HDIV)
td(PCLKL-VDIV)
Delay time, PCLK edge to HD invalid
Delay time, PCLK edge to VD invalid
ns
ns
3
11
PCLK
(Negative Edge Clocking)
PCLK
(Positive Edge Clocking)
18
20
HD
VD
Figure 5-26. VPFE (CCD) Master Mode Control Output Data Timing
5.9.2 Video Processing Back-End (VPBE)
The Video Processing Back-End of VPBE module is comprised of the On Screen Display (OSD) module
and the Video Encoder / Digital LCD Controller (VENC/DLCD).
5.9.2.1 On-Screen Display (OSD)
The primary function of the OSD module is to gather and blend video data and display/bitmap data and
then pass it to the Video Encoder (VENC) in YCbCr format. The video and display data is read from
external DDR2/mDDR memory. The OSD is programmed via control and parameter registers. The
following are the primary features that are supported by the OSD.
•
Support for two video windows and two OSD bitmapped windows that can be displayed simultaneously
(VIDWIN0/VIDWIN1 and OSDWIN0/OSDWIN1).
•
Video windows supports YCbCr data in 422 format from external memory, with the ability to
interchange the order of the CbCr component in the 32-bit word
•
•
OSD bitmap windows support /4/8 bit width index data of color palette
In addition one OSD bitmap window at a time can be configured to one of the following:
–
–
–
YUV422 (same as video data)
RGB format data in 16-bit mode (R=5bit, G=6bit, B=5bit)
24-bit mode (each R/G/B=8bit) with pixel level blending with video windows
•
Programmable color palette with the ability to select between a RAM/ROM table with support for 256
colors.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for 2 ROM tables, one of which can be selected at a given time
Separate enable/disable control for each window
Programmable width, height, and base starting coordinates for each window
External memory address and offset registers for each window
Support for x2 and x4 zoom in both the horizontal and vertical direction
Pixel-level blending/transparency/blinking attributes can be defined for OSDWIN0 when OSDWIN1 is
configured as an attribute window for OSDWIN0.
•
•
•
•
Support for blinking intervals to the attribute window
Ability to select either field/frame mode for the windows (interlaced/progressive)
An eight step blending process between the bitmap and video windows
Transparency support for the bitmap and video data (when a bitmap pixel is zero, there will be no
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
121
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
blending for that corresponding video pixel)
•
•
•
•
•
Ability to resize from VGA to NTSC/PAL (640x480 to 720x576) for both the OSD and video windows
Horizontal rescaling x1.5 is supported
Support for a rectangular cursor window and a programmable background color selection.
The width, height, and color of the cursor is selectable
The display priority is: Rectangular-Cursor > OSDWIN1 > OSDWIN0 > VIDWIN1 > VIDWIN0 >
background color
•
Support for attenuation of the YCbCr values for the REC601 standard.
The following restrictions exist in the OSD module.
•
If the vertical resize filter is enabled for either of the video windows, the maximum horizontal window
dimension cannot be greater than 720 currently. This is due to the limitation in the size of the line
memory.
•
It is not possible to use both of the CLUT ROMs at the same time. However, a window can use RAM
while another uses ROM.
5.9.2.2 Video Encoder / Digital LCD Controller (VENC/DLCD)
The VENC/DLCD consists of three major blocks; a) the video encoder that generates analog video output,
b) the digital LCD controller that generates digital RGB/YCbCr data output and timing signals, and c) the
timing generator.
The video encoder for analog video supports the following features:
•
•
•
Master Clock Input - 27 MHz (x2 Upsampling)
Programmable Timing Generator
SDTV Support
–
–
–
–
–
–
Composite NTSC-M, PAL-B/D/G/H/I
Non-Interlace option
CGMS/WSS
Line 21 Closed Caption Data Encoding
Chroma Low Pass Filter 1.5MHz/3MHz
Programmable SC-H phase
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10-bit Over-Sampling D/A Converter (27MHz)
Internal analog video buffer
Optional 7.5% Pedestal
16-235/0-255 Input Amplitude Selectable
Programmable Luma Delay
Master/Slave Operation
Internal Color Bar Generation (75%)
The digital LCD controller supports the following features:
•
•
•
Programmable DCLK
Programmable Timing Generator
Various Output Format
–
–
–
–
–
YCbCr 16bit
YCbCr 8bit
ITU-R BT. 656
Parallel RGB 16-bit/18-bit
Serial 8-bit RGB
•
•
Low Pass Filter for Digital RGB Output
Master/Slave Operation
122
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
•
•
Internal Color Bar Generation (100%/75%)
YUV/RGB modes support HDTV output (720p/1080i) with 74.25 MHz external clock input
5.9.2.3 VPBE Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-21. Timing Requirements for VPBE CLK Inputs (see Figure 5-27)
DM355
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
tc(PCLK)
Cycle time, PCLK(1)
13.33
5.7
160
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(PCLKH)
tw(PCLKL)
tt(PCLK)
Pulse duration, PCLK high
Pulse duration, PCLK low
Transition time, PCLK
5.7
3
tc(EXTCLK)
tw(EXTCLKH)
tw(EXTCLKL)
tt(EXTCLK)
Cycle time, EXTCLK
13.33
5.7
160
Pulse duration, EXTCLK high
Pulse duration, EXTCLK low
Transition time, EXTCLK
5.7
3
(1) For timing specifications relating to PCLK see Table 5-17, Timing Requirements for VPFE PCLK Master/Slave Mode.
3
1
2
PCLK
4
4
7
6
5
EXTCLK
8
8
Figure 5-27. VPBE PCLK and EXTCLK Timing
Table 5-22. Timing Requirements for VPBE Control Input With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK(1)(2)(3) (see
Figure 5-28)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
2
MAX
9
tsu(VCTLV-VCLKIN)
th(VCLKIN-VCTLV)
Setup time, VCTL valid before VCLKIN edge
Hold time, VCTL valid after VCLKIN edge
ns
ns
10
1
(1) The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the
rising edge of VCLKIN is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLKIN is referenced.
(2) VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, and FIELD
(3) VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
123
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
(A)
VCLKIN
(Positive Edge Clocking)
(A)
VCLKIN
(Negative Edge Clocking)
10
9
(B)
VCTL
A. VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK
B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, and FIELD
Figure 5-28. VPBE Input Timing With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK
Table 5-23. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and
Data Output With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK(1)(2)(3) (see Figure 5-29)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
2
MAX
11
12
13
14
td(VCLKIN-VCTLV)
td(VCLKIN-VCTLIV)
td(VCLKIN-VDATAV)
Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VCTL valid
Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VCTL invalid
Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VDATA valid
13.3
ns
ns
ns
ns
13.3
td(VCLKIN-VDATAIV) Delay time, VCLKIN edge to VDATA invalid
2
(1) The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the
rising edge of VCLKIN is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLKIN is referenced.
(2) VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK
(3) VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, FIELD, and LCD_OE
(A)
VCLKIN
(Positive Edge Clocking)
(A)
VCLKIN
(Negative Edge Clocking)
11
13
12
14
(B)
VCTL
(C)
VDATA
A. VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK
B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, FIELD, and LCD_OE
C. VDATA = COUT[7:0], YOUT[7:0], R[7:3], G[7:2], and B[7:3]
Figure 5-29. VPBE Control and Data Output With Respect to PCLK and EXTCLK
124
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-24. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for VPBE Control and
Data Output With Respect to VCLK(1)(2) (see Figure 5-30)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
13.33
5.7
MAX
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
tc(VCLK)
Cycle time, VCLK
160
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(VCLKH)
Pulse duration, VCLK high
tw(VCLKL)
Pulse duration, VCLK low
5.7
tt(VCLK)
Transition time, VCLK
3
12
12
4
td(VCLKINH-VCLKH)
td(VCLKINL-VCLKL)
td(VCLK-VCTLV)
td(VCLK-VCTLIV)
td(VCLK-VDATAV)
td(VCLK-VDATAIV)
Delay time, VCLKIN high to VCLK high
Delay time, VCLKIN low to VCLK low
Delay time, VCLK edge to VCTL valid
Delay time, VCLK edge to VCTL invalid
Delay time, VCLK edge to VDATA valid
Delay time, VCLK edge to VDATA invalid
2
2
0
4
0
(1) The VPBE may be configured to operate in either positive or negative edge clocking mode. When in positive edge clocking mode, the
rising edge of VCLK is referenced. When in negative edge clocking mode, the falling edge of VCLK is referenced.
(2) VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK. For timing specifications relating to PCLK, see Table 5-17, Timing Requirements for VPFE PCLK
Master/Slave Mode.
(A)
VCLKIN
19
21
17
22
18
VCLK
(Positive Edge
Clocking)
VCLK
(Negative Edge
Clocking)
20
23
25
20
24
26
(B)
VCTL
(C)
VDATA
A. VCLKIN = PCLK or EXTCLK
B. VCTL = HSYNC, VSYNC, FIELD, and LCD_OE
C. VDATA = COUT[7:0], YOUT[7:0], R[7:3], G[7:2], and B[7:3]
Figure 5-30. VPBE Control and Data Output Timing With Respect to VCLK
5.9.2.4 DAC and Video Buffer Electrical Data/Timing
The DAC and video buffer can be configured in a DAC only configuration or in a DAC and video buffer
configuration. In the DAC only configuration the internal video buffer is not used and an external video
buffer is attached to the DAC. In the DAC and video buffer configuration, the DAC and internal video
buffer are both used and a TV cable may be attached directly to the output of the video buffer. See
Figure 5-31 and Figure 5-32 for recommenced circuits for each configuration.
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
125
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
V
ideo DAC
Buffer
VFB
VREF
IBIAS
IOUT
TVOUT
C
BG
0.1 mF
R
BIAS
2550W
RLOAD
499W
DAC Digital Input
DAC Output Current
DIN <9:0>
MSB
Iout [mA]
1.4 mA
LSB
0
Example for External Circuit
A. Connect IOUT to a high-impedance video buffer device.
B. Place capacitors and resistors as close as possible to the DM355.
C. Configure the VDAC_CONFIG register in the system control module as follows: DINV = 0, PWD_GBZ = 1,
PWD_VBUFZ = 0, ACCUP_EN = X.
Figure 5-31. DAC Only Application Example
126
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Video DAC and Buffer
IOUT
IBIAS
VREF
VFB
TVOUT
TV monitor
R
C
BG
0.1 mF
BIAS
2550 Ω
R
fb
= 1000 Ω
R
out
= 1070 Ω
DAC Digital Input
Video Buffer Output Voltage
TVOUT [V]
DIN <9:0>
MSB
VOH(VIDBUF)
VOL(VIDBUF)
LSB
0
A. Place capacitors and resistors as close as possible to the DM355.
B. You must use the circuit shown in this diagram. Also you must configure the VDAC_CONFIG register in the System
Control module as follows: TRESB4R4 = 0x3, TRESB4R2 = 0x8, TRESB4R1 = 0x8, TRIMBITS = 0x34, PWD_BGZ =
1 (power up VREF), SPEED = 1 (faster), TVINT = don't care, PWD_VBUFZ = 1 (power up video buffer), VREFSET =
don't care, ACCUP_EN = 0 (no A/C coupling), DINV = 1 (invert).
C. For proper TVOUT voltage, you must connect the pin TVOUT directly to the TV. No A/C coupling capacitor or
termination resistor is necessary on your DM355 board. Also, it is assumed that the TV has no internal A/C coupling
capacitor but does have an internal termination resistor, as shown in this diagram. TVOUT voltage will range from
VOL(VIDBUF) to VOH(VIDBUF). See Section 4.3 for the voltage specifications.
Figure 5-32. DAC With Buffer Circuit
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
127
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.10 USB 2.0
The DM355 USB2.0 peripheral supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
USB 2.0 peripheral at speeds high speed (HS: 480 Mb/s) and full speed (FS: 12 Mb/s)
USB 2.0 host at speeds HS, FS, and low speed (LS: 1.5 Mb/s)
All transfer modes (control, bulk, interrupt, and isochronous)
Four Transmit (TX) and four Receive (RX) endpoints in addition to endpoint 0
FIFO RAM
–
–
4K bytes shared by all endpoints.
Programmable FIFO size
•
•
•
Includes a DMA sub-module that supports four TX and four RX channels of CPPI 3.0 DMAs
RNDIS mode for accelerating RNDIS type protocols using short packet termination over USB
USB OTG extensions, i.e. session request protocol (SRP) and host negotiation protocol (HNP)
The DM355 USB2.0 peripheral does not support the following features:
•
•
•
•
On-chip charge pump
High bandwidth ISO mode is not supported (triple buffering)
RNDIS mode acceleration for USB sizes that are not multiples of 64 bytes
Endpoint max USB packet sizes that do not conform to the USB 2.0 spec (for FS/LS: 8, 16, 32, 64,
and 1023 are defined; for HS: 64, 128, 512, and 1024 are defined)
5.10.1 USB2.0 Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-25. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for USB2.0 (see
Figure 5-33)
DM355
LOW SPEED
1.5 Mbps
FULL SPEED
12 Mbps
HIGH SPEED(1)
480 Mbps
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
75
MAX
MIN
4
MAX
MIN
0.5
MAX
1
2
3
4
5
tr(D)
Rise time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals(2)
Fall time, USB_DP and USB_DM signals(2)
Rise/Fall time, matching(3)
Output signal cross-over voltage(2)
Source (Host) Driver jitter, next transition
Function Driver jitter, next transition
Source (Host) Driver jitter, paired transition(4)
Function Driver jitter, paired transition
Pulse duration, EOP transmitter
Pulse duration, EOP receiver
300
300
125
2
20
20
ns
ns
%
tf(D)
75
4
0.5
tfrfm
80
90 111.11
VCRS
1.3
1.3
2
2
V
tjr(source)NT
tjr(FUNC)NT
tjr(source)PT
tjr(FUNC)PT
tw(EOPT)
tw(EOPR)
t(DRATE)
2
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
25
2
6
1
1
10
1
7
8
9
1250
670
1500
160
82
175
Data Rate
1.5
–
12
480 Mb/s
49.5
10 ZDRV
Driver Output Resistance
–
28
49.5
40.5
Ω
(1) For more detailed specification information, see the Universal Serial Bus Specification Revision 2.0, Chapter 7. Electrical.
(2) Low Speed: CL = 200 pF, Full Speed: CL = 50 pF, High Speed: CL = 50 pF
(3) tfrfm = (tr/tf) x 100. [Excluding the first transaction from the Idle state.]
(4) tjr = tpx(1) - tpx(0)
t
t
per − jr
USB_DM
V
90% V
OH
CRS
10% V
OL
USB_DP
t
f
t
r
Figure 5-33. USB2.0 Integrated Transceiver Interface Timing
128
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
USB
VSS_USB_REF
USB_R1
10 K Ω 1ꢀ
Figure 5-34. USB Reference Resistor Routing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
129
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.11 Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
The DM355 contains 3 separate UART modules (1 with hardware flow control). These modules performs
serial-to-parallel conversion on data received from a peripheral device or modem, and parallel-to-serial
conversion on data received from the CPU. Each UART also includes a programmable baud rate
generator capable of dividing the 24MHz reference clock by divisors from 1 to 65,535 to produce a 16 x
clock driving the internal logic. The UART modules support the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency pre-scale values from 1 to 65,535 to generate appropriate baud rates
16-byte storage space for both the transmitter and receiver FIFOs
Unique interrupts, one for each UART
Unique EDMA events, both received and transmitted data for each UART
1, 4, 8, or 14 byte selectable receiver FIFO trigger level for autoflow control and DMA
Programmable auto-rts and auto-cts for autoflow control (supported on UART2)
Programmable serial data formats
–
–
–
5, 6, 7, or 8-bit characters
Even, odd, or no parity bit generation and detection
1, 1.5, or 2 stop bit generation
•
•
•
False start bit detection
Line break generation and detection
Internal diagnostic capabilities
–
–
Loopback controls for communications link fault isolation
Break, parity, overrun, and framing error simulation
•
Modem control functions: CTS, RTS (supported on UART2)
5.11.1 UART Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-26. Timing Requirements for UARTx Receive (see Figure 5-35)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1.05U(1)
1.05U(1)
4
5
tw(URXDB)
tw(URXSB)
Pulse duration, receive data bit (RXDn)
Pulse duration, receive start bit
0.99U(1)
0.99U(1)
ns
ns
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
Table 5-27. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for UARTx Transmit
(see Figure 5-35)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
UART0/1 Maximum programmable baud rate
UART2 Maximum programmable baud rate
Pulse duration, transmit data bit (TXDn)
Pulse duration, transmit start bit
1.5
1
f(baud)
MHz
5
2
3
tw(UTXDB)
tw(UTXSB)
U - 2(1)
U - 2(1)
U + 2(1)
U + 2(1)
ns
ns
(1) U = UART baud time = 1/programmed baud rate.
130
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
3
2
Start
Bit
UART_TXDn
Data Bits
5
4
Start
Bit
UART_RXDn
Data Bits
Figure 5-35. UART Transmit/Receive Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
131
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.12 Serial Port Interface (SPI)
The DM355 contains 3 separate SPI modules. These modules provide a programmable length shift
register which allows serial communication with other SPI devices through a 3 or 4 wire interface (Clock,
Data In, Data Out, and Enable). The SPI supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Master mode operation
2 chip selects for interfacing to multiple slave SPI devices.
3 or 4 wire interface (Clock, Data In, Data Out, and Enable)
Unique interrupt for each SPI port
Separate DMA events for SPI Receive and Transmit
16-bit shift register
Receive buffer register
Programmable character length (2 to 16 bits)
Programmable SPI clock frequency range
8-bit clock prescaler
Programmable clock phase (delay or no delay)
Programmable clock polarity
The SPI modules do not support the following features:
•
Slave mode. Only Master mode is supported in DM355 (Master mode means that DM355 provides the
serial clock).
•
GPIO mode. GPIO functionality is supported by the GIO modules for those SPI pins that are
multiplexed with GPIO signals.
5.12.1 SPI Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-28. Timing Requirements for SPI (All Modes)(1) (see Figure 5-36)
DM355
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
3
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, SPI_CLK
37.037 ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(CLKH)
tw(CLKL)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK high (All Master Modes)
Pulse duration, SPI_CLK low (All Master Modes
0.45*T
0.45*T
0.55*T
0.55*T
(1) T = tc(CLK) = SPI_CLK period is equal to the SPI module clock divided by a configurable divider.
1
2
3
SPIx_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 0)
SPIx_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 1)
Figure 5-36. SPI_CLK Timing
132
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
SPI Master Mode Timings (Clock Phase = 0)
Table 5-29. Timing Requirements for SPI Master Mode [Clock Phase = 0] (1)(see Figure 5-37)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Setup time, SPI_DI (input) valid before SPI_CLK (output)
falling edge
4
5
6
7
tsu(DIV-CLKL)
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
th(CLKL-DIV)
th(CLKH-DIV)
Clock Polarity = 0
Clock Polarity = 1
Clock Polarity = 0
Clock Polarity = 1
.5P + 3
ns
ns
ns
ns
Setup time, SPI_DI (in put) valid before SPI_CLK (output)
rising edge
.5P + 3
.5P + 3
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) falling
edge
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) rising
edge
2.5P + 3
(1) P = 1/SYSCLK2 in nanoseconds (ns). For example, if the SYSCLK2 frequency is 135 MHz, use P = 7.41 ns. See Section 3.5, Device
Clocking, for more information on the supported clock configurations of the DM355.
Table 5-30. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Master Mode
[Clock Phase = 0] (see Figure 5-37)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
8
9
td(CLKH-DOV)
td(CLKL-DOV)
td(ENL-CLKH/L)
Clock Polarity = 0
Clock Polarity = 1
-4
5
ns
ns
ns
ns
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
-4
5
Delay time, SPI_EN[1:0] (output) falling edge to first SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling
edge
(1)
10
11
2P(1)
P+.5C(2
(2)
td(CLKH/L-ENH) Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling edge to SPI_EN[1:0] (output) rising edge
)
(1) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register C2TDELAY.
(2) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register T2CDELAY.
11
SPI_EN
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 0)
10
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 1)
7
6
4
5
SPI_DI
(Input)
MSB IN
DATA
LSB IN
8
9
SPI_DO
(Output)
MSB OUT
DATA
LSB OUT
Figure 5-37. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
133
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
SPI Master Mode Timings (Clock Phase = 1)
Table 5-31. Timing Requirements for SPI Master Mode [Clock Phase = 1] (see Figure 5-38)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Setup time, SPI_DI (input) valid before SPI_CLK (output)
rising edge
13
14
15
16
tsu(DIV-CLKL)
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
th(CLKL-DIV)
th(CLKH-DIV)
Clock Polarity = 0
Clock Polarity = 1
Clock Polarity = 0
Clock Polarity = 1
.5P + 3
ns
ns
ns
ns
Setup time, SPI_DI (in put) valid before SPI_CLK (output)
falling edge
.5P + 3
.5P + 3
.5P + 3
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) rising
edge
Hold time, SPI_DI (input) valid after SPI_CLK (output) falling
edge
Table 5-32. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for SPI Master Mode
[Clock Phase = 1] (see Figure 5-38)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
17
18
td(CLKL-DOV)
td(CLKH-DOV)
td(ENL-CLKH/L)
Clock Polarity = 0
Clock Polarity = 1
-4
5
ns
ns
Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) rising edge to SPI_DO
(output) transition
-4
5
Delay time, SPI_EN[1:0] (output) falling edge to first SPI_CLK (output) rising or falling
edge
2P+.5C
(1)
(2)
19
20
ns
ns
(1)
td(CLKL/H-DOHz) Delay time, SPI_CLK (output) falling or rising edge to SPI_DO (output) high impedance
P(2)
(1) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register C2TDELAY.
(2) The delay time can be adjusted using the SPI module register T2CDELAY.
SPI_EN
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 0)
19
SPI_CLK
(Clock Polarity = 1)
15
16
13
14
SPI_DI
(Input)
MSB IN
DATA
DATA
LSB IN
18
17
SPI_DO
(Output)
MSB OUT
LSB OUT
Figure 5-38. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)
134
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.13 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between DM355 and other devices
compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus) specification version 2.1 and connected by
way of an I2C-bus. External components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit/receive up to 8-bit
data to/from the DM355 through the I2C module.
The I2C port supports:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compatible with Philips I2C Specification Revision 2.1 (January 2000)
Fast Mode up to 400 Kbps (no fail-safe I/O buffers)
Noise Filter to Remove Noise 50 ns or less
Seven- and Ten-Bit Device Addressing Modes
Master (Transmit/Receive) and Slave (Transmit/Receive) Functionality
Events: DMA, Interrupt, or Polling
Slew-Rate Limited Open-Drain Output Buffers
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
135
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.13.1 I2C Electrical Data/Timing
5.13.1.1 Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) Timing
Table 5-33. Timing Requirements for I2C Timings(1) (see Figure 5-39)
DM355
STANDARD
MODE
NO.
FAST MODE
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
2
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
µs
Setup time, SCL high before SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
tsu(SCLH-SDAL)
4.7
4
0.6
0.6
Hold time, SCL low after SDA low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
3
th(SCLL-SDAL)
µs
4
5
6
7
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
4
1.3
0.6
100(2)
µs
µs
ns
µs
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
tsu(SDAV-SCLH)
th(SDA-SCLL)
Setup time, SDA valid before SCL high
Hold time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C bus™ devices)
250
0(3)
0(3) 0.9(4)
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
8
tw(SDAH)
4.7
1.3
µs
(5)
9
tr(SDA)
Rise time, SDA
1000 20 + 0.1Cb
1000 20 + 0.1Cb
300 20 + 0.1Cb
300 20 + 0.1Cb
300
300
300
300
ns
ns
ns
ns
µs
ns
pF
(5)
(5)
(5)
10
11
12
13
14
15
tr(SCL)
Rise time, SCL
tf(SDA)
Fall time, SDA
tf(SCL)
Fall time, SCL
tsu(SCLH-SDAH)
tw(SP)
Setup time, SCL high before SDA high (for STOP condition)
Pulse duration, spike (must be suppressed)
Capacitive load for each bus line
4
0.6
0
50
(5)
Cb
400
400
(1) The I2C pins SDA and SCL do not feature fail-safe I/O buffers. These pins could potentially draw current when the device is powered
down.
(2) A Fast-mode I2C-bus™ device can be used in a Standard-mode I2C-bus system, but the requirement tsu(SDA-SCLH)≥ 250 ns must then be
met. This will automatically be the case if the device does not stretch the LOW period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch
the LOW period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line tr max + tsu(SDA-SCLH)= 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns
(according to the Standard-mode I2C-Bus Specification) before the SCL line is released.
(3) A device must internally provide a hold time of at least 300 ns for the SDA signal (referred to the VIHmin of the SCL signal) to bridge the
undefined region of the falling edge of SCL.
(4) The maximum th(SDA-SCLL) has only to be met if the device does not stretch the low period [tw(SCLL)] of the SCL signal.
(5) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
11
9
SDA
SCL
6
8
14
4
13
5
10
1
12
3
2
7
3
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 5-39. I2C Receive Timings
136
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-34. Switching Characteristics for I2C Timings(1) (see Figure 5-40)
DM355
STANDARD
MODE
NO.
PARAMETER
FAST MODE
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
16
17
tc(SCL)
Cycle time, SCL
10
2.5
µs
µs
Delay time, SCL high to SDA low (for a repeated START
condition)
td(SCLH-SDAL)
4.7
4
0.6
0.6
Delay time, SDA low to SCL low (for a START and a repeated
START condition)
18
td(SDAL-SCLL)
µs
19
20
21
22
tw(SCLL)
Pulse duration, SCL low
4.7
4
1.3
0.6
100
0
µs
µs
ns
µs
tw(SCLH)
Pulse duration, SCL high
td(SDAV-SCLH)
tv(SCLL-SDAV)
Delay time, SDA valid to SCL high
Valid time, SDA valid after SCL low (For I2C devices)
250
0
0.9
10
Pulse duration, SDA high between STOP and START
conditions
23
tw(SDAH)
4.7
4
1.3
0.6
µs
28
29
td(SCLH-SDAH)
Cp
Delay time, SCL high to SDA high (for STOP condition)
Capacitance for each I2C pin
µs
10
pF
(1) Cb = total capacitance of one bus line in pF. If mixed with HS-mode devices, faster fall-times are allowed.
CAUTION
The DM355 I2C pins use a standard ±4-mA LVCMOS buffer, not the slow I/OP buffer
defined in the I2C specification. Series resistors may be necessary to reduce noise at
the system level.
SDA
SCL
21
23
19
28
20
16
18
17
22
18
Stop
Start
Repeated
Start
Stop
Figure 5-40. I2C Transmit Timings
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
137
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.14 Audio Serial Port (ASP)
DM355 includes two separate ASP controllers. The primary use for the audio serial port (ASP) is for audio
interface purposes. The primary audio modes that are supported by the ASP are the AC97 and IIS modes.
In addition to the primary audio modes, the ASP supports general serial port receive and transmit
operation, but is not intended to be used as a high-speed interface. The ASP is backward compatible with
other TI ASPs. The ASP supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Full-duplex communication
Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream
Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit
External shift clock generation or an internal programmable frequency shift clock
Double-buffered data registers, which allow a continuous data stream
Independent framing and clocking for receive and transmit
Direct interface to industry-standard codecs, analog interface chips (AICs), and other serially
connected analog-to-digital (A/D) and digital-to-analog (D/A) devices
•
Direct interface to AC97 compliant devices (the necessary multiphase frame synchronization capability
is provided)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct interface to IIS compliant devices
Direct interface to SPI protocol in master mode only
A wide selection of data sizes, including 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, and 32 bits
µ-Law and A-Law companding
8-bit data transfers with the option of LSB or MSB first
Programmable polarity for both frame synchronization and data clocks
Highly programmable internal clock and frame generation
138
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.14.1 ASP Electrical Data/Timing
5.14.1.1 Audio Serial Port (ASP) Timing
Table 5-35. Timing Requirements for ASP(1) (see Figure 5-41)
DM355
NO.
UNIT
MIN
MAX
15
16
tc(CLK)
Cycle time, CLK
CLK ext
38.5 or 2P(2)(3)
19.25 or P(2)(3)(4)
ns
ns
OTG(CLKS)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKS ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
21
6
5
6
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
th(CKRL-FRH)
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
th(CKRL-DRV)
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
th(CKXL-FXH)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
0
6
21
6
7
0
8
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
6
21
6
10
11
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
0
10
(1) CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
(2) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .
(3) Use which ever value is greater.
(4) The ASP does not have a duty cycle specification, just ensure that the minimum pulse duration specification is met.
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
139
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 5-36. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for ASP(1)(2)
(see Figure 5-41)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
2
17
3
tc(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
CLKR/X int
CLKR/X int
CLKR int
CLKR ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
CLKX int
CLKX ext
FSX int
38.5 or 2P(3)(4)(5)
ns
td(CLKS-CLKRX) Delay time, CLKS high to internal CLKR/X
1
24
C + 1(6)
25
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
C - 1(6)
ns
ns
3
3
4
9
td(CKRH-FRV)
25
-4
3
8
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
ns
25
12
ns
ns
ns
ns
tdis(CKXH-
DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data
bit from CLKX high
12
13
12
-5
3
12
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
25
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
14
14
td(FXH-DXV)
ns
FSX ext
25
(1) CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also
inverted.
(2) Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
(3) Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times
are based on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
(4) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .
(5) Use which ever value is greater.
(6) C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/SYSCLK2, where SYSCLK2 is an output of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) )
S = sample rate generator input clock = CLKS if CLKSM = 0
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
H = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
L = (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the ASP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see footnote (3) above).
140
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
16
15
16
CLKS
2
17
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
DR
7
8
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
17
3
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX
(XDATDLY=00b)
(A)
13
14
(A)
13
Bit(n-1)
12
DX
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
A. Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bitonly when XDATDLY ≠ 0.
Figure 5-41. ASP Timing
Table 5-37. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements
CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 5-42)
MASTER
NO.
UNIT
MIN
11
0
MAX
M30
M31
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
ns
ns
Table 5-38. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics(1)(2)
CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 5-42)
MASTER
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
38.5 or
M33
tc(CKX)
Cycle time, CLKX
ns
2P(1)(3)
T – 2
L1 – 2
–2
M24
M25
M26
M27
td(CKXL-FXH)
td(FXL-CKXH)
td(CKXH-DXV)
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Delay time, CLKX low to FSX high(2)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high(4)
T + 3
L1 + 2
6
ns
ns
ns
ns
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from CLKX low
L1 – 3
L1 +3
(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .
(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × 2P
L1 = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × 2P when CLKGDV is even
(3) Use which ever value is greater.
(4) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master
clock (CLKX).
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
141
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
CLKX
M33
M24
M25
FSX
M27
M26
(n-2)
DX
DR
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-3)
(n-3)
(n-4)
M30
M31
(n-2)
Bit 0
(n-4)
Figure 5-42. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
142
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-39. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements
CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
MASTER
NO.
UNIT
MIN
11
1
MAX
M39
M40
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
ns
ns
Table 5-40. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics(1)(2)
CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0 (see Figure 5-43)
MASTER
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
38.5 or
2P(1)(3)
M42
tc(CKX)
Cycle time, CLKX
ns
M34
M35
M36
td(CKXL-FXH)
td(FXL-CKXH)
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to FSX high(4)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high(5)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
L1 – 2
T – 2
–2
L1 + 3
T + 2
6
ns
ns
ns
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
M37
M38
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
td(FXL-DXV)
–3
3
ns
ns
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
H1 – 2
H1 + 10
(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .
(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × 2P
L1 = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × 2P when CLKGDV is even
H1 = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) × 2P when CLKGDV is even
(3) Use which ever value is greater.
(4) FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master ASP
(5) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
M42
M35
M34
FSX
DX
M37
M38
M39
M36
(n-2)
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-3)
(n-3)
(n-4)
M40
(n-2)
DR
Bit 0
(n-4)
Figure 5-43. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
143
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 5-41. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements
CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-44)
MASTER
NO.
UNIT
MIN
11
0
MAX
M49
M50
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
ns
ns
Table 5-42. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics(1)(2)
CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-44)
MASTER
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
38.5 or
2P(1)(3)
M52
tc(CKX)
Cycle time, CLKX
ns
M43
M44
M45
td(CKXH-FXH)
td(FXL-CKXL)
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to FSX high(4)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low(5)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
T – 1
H1 – 2
–2
T + 3
H1 + 2
6
ns
ns
ns
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
M46
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
H1 – 3
H1 + 3
ns
(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .
(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × 2P
H1 = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) × 2P when CLKGDV is even
(3) Use which ever value is greater.
(4) FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master ASP
(5) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
M43
FSX
M44
M52
M46
M45
(n-2)
DX
DR
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-3)
(n-4)
M49
M50
(n-2)
Bit 0
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 5-44. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
144
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
Table 5-43. ASP as SPI Timing Requirements
CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-45)
MASTER
UNIT
NO.
MIN
11
0
MAX
M58
M59
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
ns
ns
Table 5-44. ASP as SPI Switching Characteristics(1)(2)
CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1 (see Figure 5-45)
MASTER
MIN
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MAX
38.5 or
M62
tc(CKX)
Cycle time, CLKX
ns
2P(3)(3)
H1 – 1
T – 2
–2
M53
M54
M55
td(CKXH-FXH)
td(FXL-CKXL)
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to FSX high(4)
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low(5)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
H1 + 3
T + 2
6
ns
ns
ns
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
M56
M57
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
td(FXL-DXV)
– 3
+ 3
ns
ns
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
L1 – 1
L1 + 10
(1) P = (1/SYSCLK2), where SYSCLK2 is an output clock of PLLC1 (see Section 3.5) .
(2) T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) × 2P
L1 = CLKX low pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2) × 2P when CLKGDV is even
H1 = CLKX high pulse width = T/2 when CLKGDV is odd or zero and = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) × 2P when CLKGDV is even
(3) Use which ever value is greater.
(4) FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for master ASP
(5) FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the master
clock (CLKX).
CLKX
M62
M53
M54
FSX
DX
M57
M56
M55
(n-2)
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
Bit(n-1)
(n-3)
(n-4)
M58
M59
(n-2)
DR
Bit 0
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 5-45. ASP as SPI: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
145
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.15 Timer
The DM355 contains four software-programmable timers. Timer 0, Timer 1, and Timer 3 (general-purpose
timers) can be programmed in 64-bit mode, dual 32-bit unchained mode, or dual 32-bit chained mode.
Timer 3 supports additional features over the other timers: external clock/event input, period reload, output
event tied to Real Time Out (RTO) module, external event capture, and timer counter register read reset.
Timer 2 is used only as a watchdog timer. Timer 2 is tied to device reset.
•
•
64-bit count-up counter
Timer modes:
–
–
–
64-bit general-purpose timer mode (Timer 0, 1, 3)
Dual 32-bit general-purpose timer mode (Timer 0, 1, 3)
Watchdog timer mode (Timer 2)
•
•
Two possible clock sources:
–
–
Internal clock
External clock/event input via timer input pins (Timer 3)
Three possible operation modes:
–
–
–
One-time operation (timer runs for one period then stops)
Continuous operation (timer automatically resets after each period)
Continuous operation with period reload (Timer 3)
•
•
•
•
•
Generates interrupts to the ARM CPU
Generates sync event to EDMA
Generates output event to device reset (Timer 2)
Generates output event to Real Timer Out (RTO) module (Timer 3)
External event capture via timer input pins (Timer 3)
5.15.1 Timer Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-45. Timing Requirements for Timer Input(1)(2)(3) (see Figure 5-46)
DM355
MIN
NO.
UNIT
MAX
1
2
3
4
tc(TIN)
Cycle time, TIM_IN
4P
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(TINPH)
tw(TINPL)
tt(TIN)
Pulse duration, TIM_IN high
Pulse duration, TIM_IN low
Transition time, TIM_IN
0.45C
0.45C
0.55C
0.55C
0.05C
(1) GPIO000, GPIO001, GPIO002, and GPIO003 can be used as external clock inputs for Timer 3.
(2) P = MXI1/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI1/CLKIN frequency is 24 MHz use P = 41.6 ns.
(3) C = TIM_IN cycle time in ns. For example, when TIM_IN frequency is 24 MHz use C = 41.6 ns
1
2
3
4
4
TIM_IN
Figure 5-46. Timer Input Timing
146
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.16 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
The DM355 contains 4 separate Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) modules. The pulse width modulator
(PWM) feature is very common in embedded systems. It provides a way to generate a pulse periodic
waveform for motor control or can act as a digital-to-analog converter with some external components.
This PWM peripheral is basically a timer with a period counter and a first-phase duration comparator,
where bit width of the period and first-phase duration are both programmable. The Pulse Width Modulator
(PWM) modules support the following features:
•
•
•
32-bit period counter
32-bit first-phase duration counter
8-bit repeat count for one-shot operation. One-shot operation will produce N + 1 periods of the
waveform, where N is the repeat counter value.
•
•
•
Configurable to operate in either one-shot or continuous mode
Buffered period and first-phase duration registers
One-shot operation triggerable by hardware events with programmable edge transitions. (low-to-high or
high-to-low).
•
One-shot operation triggerable by the CCD VSYNC output of the video processing subsystem (VPSS),
which allows any of the PWM instantiations to be used as a CCD timer. This allows the DM355 module
to support the functions provided by the CCD timer feature (generating strobe and shutter signals).
•
•
•
One-shot operation generates N+1 periods of waveform, N being the repeat count register value
Configurable PWM output pin inactive state
Interrupt and EDMA synchronization events
5.16.1 PWM0/1/2/3 Electrical/Timing Data
Table 5-46. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for PWM0/1/2/3
Outputs(1) (see Figure 5-47 and Figure 5-48)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
P
MAX
1
2
3
4
tw(PWMH)
tw(PWML)
Pulse duration, PWMx high
ns
ns
ns
ns
Pulse duration, PWMx low
P
tt(PWM)
Transition time, PWMx
.05P
10
td(CCDC-PWMV)
Delay time, CCDC(VD) trigger event to PWMx valid
(1) P = MXI1/CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when MXI1/CLKIN frequency is 24 MHz use P = 41.6 ns.
1
2
PWM0/1/2/3
3
3
Figure 5-47. PWM Output Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
147
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
VD(CCDC)
4
INVALID
VALID
PWM0
PWM1
4
INVALID
VALID
4
INVALID
VALID
PWM2
PWM3
4
INVALID
VALID
Figure 5-48. PWM Output Delay Timing
148
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.17 Real Time Out (RTO)
The DM355 Real Time Out (RTO) peripheral supports the following features:
•
•
Four separate outputs
Trigger on Timer3 event
5.17.1 RTO Electrical/Timing Data
Table 5-47. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for RTO Outputs (see
Figure 5-49 and Figure 5-50)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
P
MAX
1
2
3
4
tw(RTOH)
Pulse duration, RTOx high
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(RTOL)
Pulse duration, RTOx low
P
tt(RTO)
Transition time, RTOx
.1P
10
td(TIMER3-RTOV)
Delay time, Timer 3 (TINT12 or TINT34) trigger event to RTOx valid
1
2
RTO0/1/2/3
3
3
Figure 5-49. RTO Output Timing
TINT12/TINT34
(Timer3)
4
RTO0
RTO1
INVALID
VALID
4
INVALID
VALID
4
INVALID
4
VALID
RTO2
RTO3
INVALID
VALID
Figure 5-50. RTO Output Delay Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
149
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
5.18 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
The JTAG(1) interface is used for BSDL testing and emulation of the DM355 device.
The DM355 device requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be properly
initialized. While RESET initializes the device, TRST initializes the device's emulation logic. Both resets
are required for proper operation.
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for
the device to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG
port interface and device's emulation logic in the reset state.
TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG controller to debug the device or
exercise the device's boundary scan functionality. Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by
TCK; otherwise, the boundary scan logic may not respond as expected after TRST is asserted.
RESET must be released only in order for boundary-scan JTAG to read the variant field of IDCODE
correctly. Other boundary-scan instructions work correctly independent of current state of RESET.
For maximum reliability, DM355 includes an internal pulldown (PD) on the TRST pin to ensure that TRST
will always be asserted upon power up and the device's internal emulation logic will always be properly
initialized.
JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some third-party JTAG
controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST.
When using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to initialize the device after powerup and externally
drive TRST high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations. Following the release of
RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must be "seen" to latch the state of EMU1 and EMU0. The
EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Emulation mode. For more detailed
information, see the terminal functions section of this data sheet.
(1) IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
150
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
5.18.1 JTAG Test-Port Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-48. Timing Requirements for JTAG Test Port (see Figure 5-51)
DM355
MIN MAX
NO.
UNIT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
tc(TCK)
Cycle time, TCK
20
8
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(TCKH)
Pulse duration, TCK high
tw(TCKL)
Pulse duration, TCK low
8
tsu(TDIV-RTCKH)
th(RTCKH-TDIIV)
tsu(TMSV-RTCKH)
th(RTCKH-TMSIV)
Setup time, TDI valid before RTCK high
Hold time, TDI valid after RTCK high
Setup time, TMS valid before RTCK high
Hold time, TMS valid after RTCK high
10
9
2
5
1
2
3
TCK
RTCK
TDO
TDI
5
7
4
6
TMS
Figure 5-51. JTAG Input Timing
Submit Documentation Feedback
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
151
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
SPRS575–JULY 2009
www.ti.com
Table 5-49. Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for JTAG Test Port
(see Figure 5-51)
DM355
NO.
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
8
9
tc(RTCK)
Cycle time, RTCK
20
10
10
ns
tw(RTCKH)
Pulse duration, RTCK high
Pulse duration, RTCK low
10 tw(RTCKL)
11 tr(all JTAG outputs) Rise time, all JTAG outputs
12 tf(all JTAG outputs) Fall time, all JTAG outputs
1.3
ns
ns
1.3
0.25*tc(RT
CK)
13 td(RTCKL-TDOV)
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
0
ns
8
9
10
RTCK
TDO
13
Figure 5-52. JTAG Output Timing
152
DM355 Peripheral Information and Electrical Specifications
Submit Documentation Feedback
SM320DM355-EP
Digital Media System-on-Chip (DMSoC)
www.ti.com
SPRS575–JULY 2009
6 Mechanical Data
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA – GCE mechanical
package. Note that micro-vias are not required. Contact your TI representative for routing
recommendations.
6.1 Thermal Data for GCE
The following table shows the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA – GCE mechanical
package.
Table 6-1. Thermal Resistance Characteristics (PBGA Package) [GCE]
NO.
1
°C/W(1)
7.2
RΘJC
RΘJB
RΘJA
PsiJT
PsiJB
Junction-to-case
2
Junction-to-board
Junction-to-free air
Junction-to-package top
Junction-to-board
11.4
27.0
0.1
3
4
5
11.3
(1) The junction-to-case measurement was conducted in a JEDEC defined 2S2P system and will change based on environment as well as
application. For more information, see these three EIA/JEDEC standards:
•
•
•
EIA/JESD51-2, Integrated Circuits Thermal Test Method Environment Conditions - Natural Convection (Still Air)
EIA/JESD51-3, Low Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages
JESD51-7, High Effective Thermal Conductivity Test Board for Leaded Surface Mount Packages
6.1.1 Packaging Information
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current data available for the
designated device(s). This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
Note that micro-vias are not required for this package.
Submit Documentation Feedback
Mechanical Data
153
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
28-Aug-2009
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status (1)
Package Package
Pins Package Eco Plan (2) Lead/Ball Finish MSL Peak Temp (3)
Qty
Type
Drawing
SM32DM355GCEM216EP
V62/09643-01XE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
NFBGA
NFBGA
GCE
337
337
160
160
TBD
TBD
SNPB
SNPB
Level-3-260C-168 HR
Level-3-260C-168 HR
GCE
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in
a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2)
Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check
http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements
for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered
at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and
package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS
compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame
retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material)
(3)
MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder
temperature.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is
provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the
accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take
reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on
incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited
information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI
to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 1
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products
Applications
Audio
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
dataconverter.ti.com
www.dlp.com
www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters
DLP® Products
Automotive
www.ti.com/automotive
www.ti.com/communications
Communications and
Telecom
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Computers and
Peripherals
www.ti.com/computers
Clocks and Timers
Interface
www.ti.com/clocks
interface.ti.com
logic.ti.com
Consumer Electronics
Energy
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
www.ti.com/energy
Logic
Industrial
www.ti.com/industrial
Power Mgmt
Microcontrollers
RFID
power.ti.com
Medical
www.ti.com/medical
microcontroller.ti.com
www.ti-rfid.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Space, Avionics &
Defense
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf
Video and Imaging
Wireless
www.ti.com/video
www.ti.com/wireless-apps
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
相关型号:
V62/10603-01XE
3.0-V TO 5.5-V, 12-BIT, 200-KSPS, 4-/8-CHANNEL, LOW-POWER SERIAL ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER WITH AUTOPOWER-DOWN
TI
V62/10604-01XE
All-Format Oversampled Component Video/PC Graphics D/A System With Three 11-Bit DACs, CGMS Data Insertion
TI
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明